Page 1 USER MANUAL RADWIN 5000 POINT TO MULTIPOINT BROADBAND WIRELESS Release 3.5.70...
Page 2: Notice
RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Notice This manual contains information that is proprietary to RADWIN Ltd (RADWIN hereafter). No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RADWIN. Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know‐how, trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the RADWIN products and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RADWIN protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RADWIN. The RADWIN name is a registered trademark of RADWIN. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark. You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the User Manual or any other RADWIN documentation or products. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality based or derived in any way from RADWIN products.Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement. This Agreement is effective upon your opening of a RADWIN product package and shall continue until terminated. RADWIN may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term thereof. Upon such termination by RADWIN, you agree to return to RADWIN any RADWIN products and documentation and all copies and portions thereof. For further information contact RADWIN at one of the addresses under Worldwide Contacts below or contact your local distributor. Disclaimer The parameters quoted in this document must be specifically confirmed in writing before they become applicable to any particular order or contract. RADWIN reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detail specification at its discretion. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of RADWIN, or others. Trademarks WinLink 1000, RADWIN 2000, RADWIN 5000, RADWIN 6000 and RADWIN 600 are trademarks of RADWIN Ltd RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 3 Windows 2000, XP Pro, Vista, Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Inc. Mozilla and Firefox are trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation. Other product names are trademarks of their respective manufacturers. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 4: Radwin Worldwide Offices
RADWIN Worldwide Offices Corporate and EMEA Regional Headquarters Corporate and EMEA Headquarters North America Regional Headquarters 27 Habarzel Street 900 Corporate Drive Tel Aviv,6971039 Mahwah, NJ, 07430 Israel Tel: +972.3.766.2900 Tel: +1-877-RADWIN US Fax: +972.3.766.2902 (+1-877 723-9468) Tel: +1-201-252-4224 sales@radwin.com Email: Fax: +1-201-621-8911 salesna@radwin.com Email: Customer Support - North America: Hours: 9 am - 6 pm EST (Mon - Fri) supportusa@radwin.com...
Page 5: Regulatory Compliance
FCC ‐ Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when using the outdoor antenna kits in the United States (or where FCC rules apply), only those antennas certified with the product are used. The use of any antenna other than those certified with the product is expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 Warning CFR part 15.204. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when configuring the radio in the United States (or where FCC rules apply), the Tx power is set according to the values for which the product is certified. The use of Tx power values other than those, for which the product is certified, is Warning expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 CFR part 15.204. Indoor Units comply with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause harmful interference. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 6 Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may void the product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. Resellers or distributors of this equipment are not liable Caution for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas. The installer should configure the output power level of antennas according to country regulations and antenna type. • Where Outdoor units are configurable by software to Tx power values other than those for which the product is certified, it is the responsi‐ bility of the Professional Installer to restrict the Tx power to the certi‐ fied limits. • This product was tested with special accessories ‐ indoor unit (IDU or Warning PoE), FTP CAT‐5e shielded cable with sealing gasket, 10 AWG ground‐ ing cable ‐ which must be used with the unit to insure compliance. (2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canadian Emission Requirements for Indoor Units This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES‐003. Cet appareil numẻrique de la classe B est conforme ả la norme NMB‐003 du Canada. China MII Operation of the equipment is only allowed under China MII 5.8GHz band regulation configuration with EIRP limited to 33 dBm (2 Watt). India WPC Operation of the equipment is only allowed under India WPC GSR‐38 for 5.8GHz band regulation configuration. Unregulated In countries where the radio is not regulated the equipment can be operated in any regulation configuration, best results will be obtained using Universal regulation configuration. Safety Practices Applicable requirements of National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70; and the National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI/IEEE C2, must be considered during installation. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 7 NOTES: 1. A Primary Protector is not required to protect the exposed wiring as long as the exposed wiring length is limited to less than or equal to 140 feet, and instructions are provided to avoid exposure of wiring to accidental contact with lightning and power conductors in accordance with NEC Sections 725‐54 (c) and 800‐30. In all other cases, an appropriate Listed Primary Protector must be provided. Refer to Articles 800 and 810 of the NEC for details. 2. For protection of ODU against direct lightning strikes, appropriate requirements of NFPA 780 should be considered in addition to NEC. 3. For Canada, appropriate requirements of the CEC 22.1 including Section 60 and additional requirements of CAN/CSA‐B72 must be considered as applicable. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 8 Contents at a Glance Part 1: Basic Installation Chapter 1: About this User Manual Chapter 2: Introduction Chapter 3: Site Survey Chapter 4: Hardware Installation Part 2: Sector Installation Chapter 5: Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Chapter 6: Installing the Sector Chapter 7: Operating Under the FCC Unrestricted Contention Based Protocol Part 3: Sector Management Chapter 8: Managing the Sector Chapter 9: Direct HSU Configuration Chapter 10: Smart Bandwidth Management Chapter 11: Bringing Up a Mobility Sector Chapter 12: Monitoring and Diagnostics Part 4: Site Synchronization Chapter 13: Hub Site Synchronization Chapter 14: Serial Hub Site Synchronization Chapter 15: Hub Site Synchronization over Ethernet Chapter 16: Using the RADWIN GSU Part 5: Advanced Installation Topics Chapter 17: Software Backup and Upgrade Chapter 18: VLAN Functionality with RADWIN 5000 HPMP Chapter 19: False Radar Mitigation Facilities Chapter 20: FCC/IC DFS Considerations Chapter 21: Quality of Service Chapter 22: Capacity Upgrade Part 6: Field Installation Topics Chapter 23: Link Budget Calculator Chapter 24: Spectrum View Chapter 25: Using the Web Interface Part 7: Product Reference Appendix A: Technical Specifications Appendix B: Wiring Specifications Appendix C: MIB Reference Appendix D: RF Exposure Appendix E: Setting Antenna Parameters Appendix F: Regional Notice: French Canadian Index RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual...
Page 9: Table Of Contents
RADWIN Worldwide Offices ......................iii Regulatory Compliance ........................iv Part 1: Basic Installation Chapter 1: About this User Manual Manual Structure ........................1‐1 Terminology ..........................1‐3 Chapter 2: Introduction Welcome to RADWIN 5000!...................... 2‐1 What’s New in Release 3.5.70....................2‐1 Key features of RADWIN 5000 ....................2‐2 Components of a RADWIN 5000 Point to Multipoint Sector ............ 2‐3 Chapter 3: Site Survey Planning the Sector Site ......................3‐1 The Site Survey.......................... 3‐1 Stage 1: Preliminary Survey....................... 3‐2 Stage 2: Physical Survey ......................3‐3 Stage 3: RF Survey ........................3‐4 RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites ............3‐4 Chapter 4: Hardware Installation...
Page 10 Concepts............................ 6‐1 Working with Nomadic HSUs ....................6‐2 Workflow........................... 6‐2 Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings ..................6‐3 Configuring the Sector out of the Box ‐ IP Addresses ............... 6‐8 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window................6‐10 Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS..................6‐20 Configuring a nomadic HSU From the HBS................6‐26 Registering a fixed HSU for service ..................6‐27 Registering a nomadic HSU for service ................... 6‐32 Choosing Diversity Antenna Mode During Registration............6‐35 Deactivating the HBS....................... 6‐35 Deregistering an HSU ......................6‐37 Where has my HSU gone?....................... 6‐37 Saving the HBS Settings for Reuse as a Template ..............6‐37 Creating Nomadic Entries for a Sector from a HBS Template ..........6‐37 Chapter 7: Operating Under the FCC Unrestricted Contention Based Protocol...
Page 11 WiFi Connectivity for a Vehicular Mobile Unit..............11‐17 Continuing Pre‐Configuration ....................11‐21 Checking the GPS ........................11‐27 Chapter 12: Monitoring and Diagnostics Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) ................ 12‐1 Link Compatibility........................12‐4 Throughput Checking ......................12‐6 Recent Events.......................... 12‐8 Performance Monitoring......................12‐9 RADWIN Manager Traps ....................... 12‐16 Active Alarms ........................12‐17 Other Diagnostic Aids......................12‐18 Part 4: Site Synchronization Chapter 13: Hub Site Synchronization What is Hub Site Synchronization (HSS).................. 13‐1 RADWIN HSS..........................13‐1 HSS Concepts: Radio Frame Pattern (RFP) ................13‐4 Which Type of HSS to Use ....................... 13‐5 Chapter 14: Serial Hub Site Synchronization...
Page 12 VLAN Tagging .......................... 18‐2 VLAN Configuration Using the RADWIN Manager ..............18‐6 Chapter 19: False Radar Mitigation Facilities Who needs it ........................... 19‐1 DFS and False Radar Mitigation ....................19‐1 Configuring False Radar Mitigation ..................19‐2 FCC/IC Requirements ......................19‐3 Chapter 20: FCC/IC DFS Considerations FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration ....................20‐1 Registering the Device......................20‐1 TDWR Table..........................20‐5 Chapter 21: Quality of Service Prerequisites ........................... 21‐1 QoS ‐ Overview........................21‐1 Setting up QoS......................... 21‐1 Chapter 22: Capacity Upgrade What is Capacity Upgrade ....................... 22‐1 Applicability..........................22‐1 Data Gathering ........................
Page 13 HBS/HSS Unit Connection Pinout....................B‐2 User Port Connectors ........................ B‐3 DC Power Terminals ........................B‐4 VMU Connectors ........................B‐4 Appendix C: MIB Reference Introduction ..........................C‐1 Interface API..........................C‐2 Private MIB Structure........................ C‐2 MIB Parameters ........................C‐3 Appendix D: RF Exposure Appendix E: Setting Antenna Parameters Antenna Issues .......................... E‐1 About Single and Dual Antennas....................E‐1 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters ..............E‐4 Appendix F: Regional Notice: French Canadian Procédures de sécurité......................F‐1 Installation sur pylône et mur ....................F‐3 Index RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 14 ARABOLIC EXTERNAL ANTENNA 4‐16 P G ..............4‐9 IGURE ARABOLIC EXTERNAL ANTENNA 4‐17 HSS I U ................4‐10 IGURE NTERCONNECTION 4‐18 RADWIN GSU ‐ ............. 4‐10 IGURE FRONT REAR VIEW 4‐19 G GSU E HSS ....4‐11...
Page 15 HSU ....5‐33 IGURE DISPLAY EXTRACT CROLL RIGHT MORE FIELDS 5‐33 L HSU..................5‐35 IGURE OGGING 5‐34 O RADWIN M ‐ HSU ........... 5‐35 IGURE PENING ANAGER WINDOW 5‐35 HSU ................. 5‐37 IGURE MAIN BUTTON MENU 5‐36 M P ‐ HBS................5‐39...
Page 16 3 ......10‐14 IGURE TILIZATION ECTOR ELATIVE TIME LINE XAMPLE 10‐16 HSU U ‐ S R ‐ E 3 ........... 10‐15 IGURE TILIZATION ECTOR ELATIVE XAMPLE 10‐17 S E 4 ‐ H UL ...... 10‐16 IGURE ECTOR STATUS XAMPLE TIME SLOTS ALLOCATED RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 17 ........17‐5 IGURE OFTWARE UPGRADE PROGRESS STOP BUTTON 17‐5 S ............ 17‐5 IGURE OFTWARE UPGRADE COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY 17‐6 B B ................17‐6 IGURE ACKUP SETUP WINDOW 18‐1 VLAN RADWIN 5000 HBS ..........18‐2 IGURE SCENARIOS HANDLED RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 18 L B C ............23‐5 IGURE CCESSING UDGET ALCULATOR 23‐3 L B ‐ ............... 23‐5 IGURE UDGET WINDOW STARTUP 23‐4 RADWIN 5000 HPMP LBC ............23‐6 IGURE MAIN WINDOW 23‐5 B ....................23‐7 IGURE SELECTOR 23‐6 C ..........23‐8...
Page 19 ............... 12‐16 ABLE ANAGER ESSAGES 13‐1 R F P T ‐ RADWIN 5000 HBS........... 13‐4 ABLE ADIO RAME ATTERN ABLE 13‐2 R F P T ‐ RADWIN 2000 ..........13‐4 ABLE ADIO RAME ATTERN ABLE 13‐3 L R F P T ............13‐5 ABLE EGEND ADIO RAME ATTERN ABLES 14‐1 E...
Page 20 C‐2 P MIB P ‐ HBS................C‐6 ABLE RIVATE ARAMETERS C‐3 P MIB P ‐ HSU ................C‐39 ABLE RIVATE ARAMETERS C‐4 MIB T ......................C‐72 ABLE RAPS D‐1 S D RADWIN 5000 HPMP FCC IC P ......D‐1 ABLE AFETY ISTANCES RODUCTS D‐2 S D RADWIN 5000 HPMP ETSI P ........D‐2 ABLE AFETY ISTANCES RODUCTS E‐1 S M ‐ D ...
Page 21: Part 1: Basic Installation
Part 1: Basic Installation Release 3.5.70...
Page 22: Chapter 1: About This User Manual
Chapter 1: About this User Manual Manual Structure This User Manual is divided into seven functionally distinct sections reflecting the activities required to set up a RADWIN 5000 HPMP sector. The division is shown in the following table: Table 1‐1: User Manual ‐ General layout Section General Content Purpose Core information to physically install a sector: Site Basic Installation preparation and hardware Installation Understanding the RADWIN Manager windows. Using the Sector Installation RADWIN Manager to bring up a sector. Fine tuning for the base station and the subscriber units. Sector Configuration Using Smart Bandwidth Management, monitoring, and Management diagnostics, bringing up a mobility sector. Intra‐site with Hub Site Synchronization, inter‐site with the Site Synchronization GPS Synchronization Unit Advanced Software upgrade, VLAN, QoS, Radar Mitigation, Dynamic Installation Topics Frequency Selection (Radar avoidance), Capacity upgrade Field Installation Link Budget Calculator, Spectrum View, Web interface Topics Product Reference Technical specifications, wiring tables, MIB reference Typographical Convention Where a term is defined or introduced for the first time, it is shown in Boldface. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 1‐1...
Page 23 Viewing and Printing Viewing and Printing This manual is optimized for viewing online as a PDF file. To this end it uses an 11 point Tahoma typeface for main text. Tables for most part, use 7 or 8 point fonts. Here are a few pointers for hard‐copy printing: • The text and table typefaces used are large enough to print the manual at two pages per sheet • For good legibility, use a commercial grade laser printer. A color printer is of course best, however a monochrome printer set to use gray‐scale gives acceptable results • Better quality ink jet printers also give good output Notifications Notifications consist of Warnings, Cautions and Notes. The purpose of a Note is to • Draw your attention to something that may not be obvious or counter‐ intuitive • Emphasize a special feature or peculiarity of the RADWIN 5000 HPMP • Offer an external reference for additional information • Add a caveat that would not qualify as a full Caution or Warning (see below) • Provide additional background to what follows Note • Offer a recommendation • Highlight an indication of something to watch out for • Advise you if an action has “side effects” i.e. it may disturb something else that would be best left undisturbed • Remind you of something that should be kept in mind A Warning is a notification of risk of danger to persons operating near the equipment Warning A Caution is a notification of risk of damage to equipment or of service ...
Page 24: Terminology
Terminology Terminology • A Point to Multipoint network is typically abbreviated to PtMP. The PtMP networks described in this Manual are of course, radio links. • A PtMP link consists of at least one Base Station (BS) radio linked to several Subscriber Unit (SU) radios. The SUs are sometimes called Customer Premises Equipment (CPEs). The terminology comes from the field of telephony. • The RADWIN 5000 HPMP product suite provides the highest capacity and spectrum effi‐ ciency available in the Point to Multipoint sub‐6 GHz band. We distinguish between generic BSs and SUs and RADWIN units, relabeling the former to HBS and the latter to HSUs (H = high capacity). • The radio links are effected by using a sector antenna with the HBS. The HSUs use direc‐ tional antennas aligned to the HBS. • A Sector consists of a HBS and a group of HSUs within the angular sector covered by the HBS antenna. A Sector is typically 60°, 90° or 120° depending on the choice of antenna. • HBSs may be collocated to provide sectorial coverage up to 360°. The RF characteristics of a Sector will be common to each radio: Frequency (regulation), band and channel bandwidth. Adjacent Sectors in a PtMP network will typically use different frequencies and non‐overlapping bands to mitigate HBS self interference. • A HSU may be defined as fixed, nomadic or mobile. • A fixed HSU is just that ‐ installed at a fixed location. • A nomadic HSU is attached to a vehicle that moves about within a sector and across sec‐ tors inside a well defined area. Service is provided when the vehicle is stationary. • A mobile HSU (HMU) provides service while the vehicle to which it is attached is moving or stationary. The vehicle is typically a railway carriage, a car (automobile) or a ship. A class of HMUs, Vehicular Mobile Units (VMU) provide WiFi service and include an inte‐ grated GPS unit. • Downlink traffic is data transfer from an HBS to an HSU. •...
Page 25: Chapter 2: Introduction
Chapter 2: Introduction Welcome to RADWIN 5000! RADWIN 5000 delivers up to 250Mbps and is the ideal choice for last mile enterprise connectivity and high‐end applications that demand assured performance with guaranteed bandwidth per subscriber. RADWIN 5000 HPMP sector base station delivers up to 250Mbps, providing the highest end user capacity in the market to best support data and high resolution video applications, today and tomorrow. By delivering high capacity over a single radio unit, RADWIN solution saves valuable tower space, eases maintenance efforts and reduces the total cost of ownership per megabit. Offering a variety of powerful subscriber units (HSUs), RADWIN 5000 HPMP enables service capacity of up to 100Mbps for enterprise customers. There are three types of RADWIN 5000 subscriber units: • Fixed ‐ permanently installed at fixed locations • Nomadic ‐ installed in a vehicle that may move from one base station to another. Ser‐ vice is provided when the vehicle is stationary. • Mobile ‐ installed in any kind of moving vehicle. Service is continuous and seamless from base stations in the network. Mobile subscriber units can only be configured in a Mobile sector, which uses a different type of base station from that used with fixed and nomadic units. Mobile units may be regular form factor or dedicated Vehicular Mobile Units (VMUs) described below. What’s New in Release 3.5.70 GA release 3.5.70 adds to release 3.5.50: • 5.x GHz ETSI frequency band • 5.1 GHz FCC frequency band • New style more flexible mounting kit • Capacity upgrade of small form factor HSUs 10/25/50Mbps to 100Mbps • Upgrade VMU default capacity to 100Mbps RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 2‐1...
Page 26: Key Features Of Radwin 5000
Multiband HBSs and HSUs: 2.3‐2.4 or 2.5‐2.7 or 3.3‐3.8 or 4.9‐6.0 or 5.9‐6.4 GHz in the same unit » Simple to deploy » Web Interface for sector management (both HBS and HSU) » SFP support when connecting to a IDU‐H in place of a PoE device Mobility Capabilities » Up to 100 Mbps per HBS sector and mobile unit » High speed ‐ up to 250 Km per hour / 150 miles per hour » Long range coverage of up to 10 Km / 6 miles Base Station » High capacity sector HBS » 250 Mbps aggregate throughput » Up to 32 Subscriber Units per HBS » Fully integrated with RADWIN Legacy solutions: • Coexist (HBS‐collocatable) with RADWIN 2000 and WinLink 1000 products • Common RADWIN Manager • Common RNMS » Smart Bandwidth Management (SBM) using dynamic bandwidth allocation to maxi‐ mize service provider throughput and adhere to customer SLAs » Nomadic support (all HBSs) » Mobility support (Mobility HBSs only) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 2‐2...
Page 27: Components Of A Radwin 5000 Point To Multipoint Sector
Subscriber Units Subscriber Units » High capacity: For Fixed and Nomadic, 5/10/25/50/100 Mbps aggregate throughput. For Mobility, 50/100 Mbps aggregate throughput. » Supports customer SLAs by assignment of dedicated bandwidth for uplink and down‐ link per HSU, at the HBS » Separate uplink and downlink configurable Maximum Information Rate (MIR) per HSU » Upgradable subscriber unit capacity using a software key » Fixed, nomadic, mobility types Components of a RADWIN 5000 Point to Multipoint Sector Major Components A RADWIN 5000 Point to Multipoint Sector consists of an HBS equipped with a sector antenna, communicating with up to 32 HSUs located within the beam of its antenna. Figure 2‐1: Sector Schematic: Main Components RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 2‐3...
Page 28 Accessories Both the HBS and the HSUs communicate respectively, with the service provider and users through PoE devices. The communication protocol for both the service provider and the users is Ethernet. HBSs may be connected through IDU‐H aggregation units. Note Extended radial coverage can be achieved by setting up adjacent sectors using collocated HBSs. Accessories To build a RADWIN 5000 sector you will require some of the following accessories: • PoE devices ‐ Both Gigabit and 100 Mbps • HSS unit ‐ Collocation unit for intra‐site serial synchronization • IDU‐H Aggregation unit for a collocated hub site instead of multiple PoE devices (no HSS unit required) • GSU for inter‐site synchronization • Additional HSU types including AC powered units • Antennas ‐ A wide variety of directional and sector antennas is available • ODU and antenna mounting kits • Lightning protector for use with all RADWIN outdoor products • Ethernet repeater ‐ enables you to extend non‐GbE PoE ‐ ODU cables beyond the 100m limit • CAT 5e cables of various lengths specifically for use with RADWIN radios and PoE devices • Grounding cables Sector Management Tools RADWIN Manager The RADWIN Manager is an SNMP‐based management application which manages a complete sector over a single IP address. It can also manage HSUs separately. The intuitive, easy‐to‐use RADWIN Manager has a rich graphical user interface.
Page 29 Sector Management Tools • View the link Inventory • Inspect the Recent Events logs Full details are supplied in Chapter 25. RADWIN Network Management System (RNMS) The RADWIN Network Management System enables Service Providers to manage all RADWIN links in their network from a Network Operations Center (NOC). Using RNMS, Service Providers can configure and monitor up to 10,000 RADWIN links . The intuitive easy‐to‐use RNMS provides a full range of network surveillance, monitoring, configuration and fault management capabilities. It offers users complete visibility and control over their RADWIN‐based networks. Documentation supplied with RADWIN 5000 HPMP The technical documentation supplied with a RADWIN 5000 HPMP, is located on the product CD. It includes the following items: • A Quick Installation Guide for experienced installers (also hardcopy) • A full User Manual ‐ the document which you are reading • A Help file accessible from the RADWIN Manager • Link Budget Calculator 1. Depending on license type RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 2‐5...
Page 30: Chapter 3: Site Survey
Chapter 3: Site Survey Planning the Sector Site Overview Sector site planning consists of a set of surveys, which must be carried out before any equipment is deployed. If for some reason, the outcome of any of these surveys is negative, HBS or HSU re‐location will need to be considered. A Site Survey consists of three stages: 1. Preliminary survey ‐ The proposed sector is analyzed in the office using a topographic map. You should use additional tools such as the Link Budget Calculator or the Radio Plan‐ ner. 2. Physical survey ‐ The locations of the indoor and outdoor equipment are determined on‐ site. 3. Radio Frequency (RF) survey ‐ It is recommended that the installation area be scanned with a spectrum analyzer, to identify RF interference so as to determine a clear channel for radio installation (on‐site). The Site Survey Introduction RADWIN wireless links must be planned before installation. The designated installation sites must be appraised to determine that the wireless system is able to operate efficiently and provide connectivity without signal degradation. RADWIN 5000 HPMP offers a wide operating frequency range. A free frequency channel must be determined within the operating range, for optimum performance. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 3‐1...
Page 31: Stage 1: Preliminary Survey
• • Digital camera • Paper, pencil, and a clipboard • GPS device (optional) • Compass (optional) Stage 3: RF Survey • Spectrum Analyzer with Max Hold function and screen capture facility that can store multiple images, for documentation purposes • RF accessories (connectors and cables) • Communication devices (for example, cellular phones, or a set of walkie‐talkies) Stage 1: Preliminary Survey A preliminary survey is necessary before visiting potential installation sites. As much detail as possible should be obtained about the designated ODU installation sites and the area between them.  To perform a preliminary survey: 1. Mark the designated installation sites on a topographic map of the area. 2. Measure the distance between the sites; check that it is within the specified range of the equipment. 3. On the urban map, check for developed areas situated between the installation sites. Pay attention to these areas when performing the physical site survey; there may be tall buildings, RF towers, or transmitters, which could cause interference to a sector. 4. Check the area between the two sites for obstructions such as: • High ground ‐ hills or mountains • Lakes or large bodies of water. Water has a reflection effect on RF signals like a build‐ ing. This type of reflection causes the received amplitude to be reduced. As a rule of thumb, the presence of a large body of water between sector sites may double the required antenna height. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 3‐2...
Page 32: Stage 2: Physical Survey
Stage 2: Physical Survey 5. Determine and record the compass bearings between HBS and fixed HSUs, relative to north. 6. If there are obstructions between the two sites, calculate the Fresnel Zone (see Chapter 23 for details). 7. If the sites chosen do not meet requirements, consider alternative sites. 8. Use the Link Budget Calculator (on the CD supplied with the equipment or using the RADWIN Manager) to determine the expected performance. Stage 2: Physical Survey The physical site survey reviews the environment of the proposed installation location, to ensure that the sector sites are suitable for the wireless network. The results of the physical site survey should be recorded. It is advisable to go on a clear day, so you can more easily see any obstructions between the two sites. Note In what follows, ODU may be an HBS or a fixed HSU:  To perform a physical survey: 1. From the compass readings taken in the preliminary survey, find the azimuth (hori‐ zontal position) that each fixed HSU should face towards the HBS. 2. Using binoculars, locate any obstructions such as tall trees, high buildings, hills or mountains. Look for other RF towers between the two sites. Mark the locations of the obstructions on the map. 3. Determine the location for the ODUs (having regard for existing rooftop installations and tower space). They should be above any obstructions, considering the Fresnel zone (see Chapter 23). 4. If you need to install any type of ODU on a tower, make sure that the tower is far enough from overhead electric power lines. 5. Determine a location for the indoor equipment; it should be as close as possible to the ODU. At an existing site, there is probably an equipment room with cable‐routing channels. Outdoor CAT‐5e; Maximum cable length: 100m for 10/100BaseT and 75m for 1000BaseT (GbE PoEs) Note 6. Measure and record the path length of the cable from each ODU position to the indoor equipment room. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 3‐3...
Page 33: Stage 3: Rf Survey
Additional Outdoor Site Requirements 7. Determine the ground and lightning connection points of the installation. The ODU and PoE must both be grounded. 8. Using the Ohmmeter, measure and record the resistance of the required installation to the grounding point. The resistance must be less than 1O ohm. 9. Review the results of the physical site survey. Decide if the site is suitable for the wireless network installation. • If the site is suitable, continue with stage 3, the RF survey • If the site is not suitable, survey another site Additional Outdoor Site Requirements The ambient outdoor operating temperature should be ‐35 to 60C (‐31 to 140F). Additional Indoor Site Requirements The ambient operating temperature should be 0 to 50°C (32 to 122 °F) at a humidity of up to 90%, non condensing Stage 3: RF Survey The RF survey examines the wireless environment of the installation site, to determine whether there are available channels within the radio operating frequency band. An RF survey is performed using a spectrum analyzer. It is advisable to familiarize yourself with the spectrum analyzer before going out on site, specifically the Max Hold and Marker functions. You should perform the RF survey at each of the proposed sector sites. The survey should be carried out during a busy time of day, to best judge the worst‐case radio interference. Allow 2‐4 hours duration for a good RF survey. RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites Interference may arise from • Self‐interference from collocated RADWIN radios • Other collocated radio devices installed on the same site. To avoid or minimize interference, follow these recommendations: • For collocated RADWIN units, use an HSS unit to synchronize between them. Select a different operating channel for each collocated RADWIN unit. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 3‐4...
Page 34 RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites • If one or more collocated units are not RADWIN units, ensure that there is a physical separation of at least three meters between a RADWIN unit and any other collocated radio on the site. • Use the largest possible frequency gap between these units • Choose the best frequency channel (as clear as possible from interference). You may be able to change the band used for the sector ‐ depending on HBS model and regulations. • Decreasing the Tx Power of a sector will reduce collocation interference Use the Link Budget Calculator to determine the minimum Tx Power required to maintain sector stability. Note RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 3‐5...
Page 35: Chapter 4: Hardware Installation
Chapter 4: Hardware Installation Overview This chapter covers the requirements and procedures for the hardware installation and alignment of a RADWIN 5000 HPMP sector in accordance with prior planning. (See Chapter 3.) It is intended to assist qualified field technicians. The material in this chapter is largely generic to all RADWIN radio products unless stated otherwise. ODU may be an HBS or any type of HSU. Note Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by qualified field technicians who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. RADWIN and its resellers or Warning distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas. This chapter covers the following topics: • Unpacking and checking supplied equipment: • HBSs and HSUs • PoE devices • IDU‐H aggregation unit • Antennas • Accessories • Tools required for installation • Safety practices • Mounting an ODU • Connecting an ODU • Grounding and lightning protection for an ODU RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual...
Page 36: What's In The Box
What’s in the box • Network connection • Powering up • Establishing a radio link What’s in the box Unpacking and Checking  For each of the items below: 1. Remove the equipment from the box. 2. Check that everything listed on the enclosed Bill of Materials or Pro‐forma Invoice is present. 3. If any item is missing, contact Customer Service. You will be advised if the package should be returned for replacement, or if the missing item will be supplied separately. 4. Do not dispose of the packaging until the unit is installed and operational. Base Station Radios The RADWIN 5000 HPMP HBS package includes the following items: • One HBS ‐ see the following figure for front and rear views Front Rear Figure 4‐1: Large HBS and HSU Form Factors RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐2...
Page 37: Figure 4-2 Small Form Factor Hsu
Subscriber Units • An HBS mounting kit • A CD containing ‐ • The RADWIN Manager software • Quick Start Guide • User Manual • Link Budget Calculator • A self‐adhesive label with the MAC address and alternative Community string. Keep this label in a safe place for future reference. • Cable glands (to be used with the HBS‐PoE cable) • Quick Start Guide leaflet Subscriber Units The RADWIN 5000 HPMP HSU package include the following items: • One HSU ‐ Large form factor as shown in Figure 4‐1 or small form factor as shown in Figure 4‐2. Front Rear Figure 4‐2: Small form factor HSU Further to Figure 4‐2 above: • Integrated Antenna ODU The front panel of the ODU is the antenna • Connectorized ODU This ODU has 2xN‐type connectors for connecting an external antenna...
Page 38: Figure 4-3 Vehicular Mobile Unit - Front Panel
Mobile Subscriber Unit ‐ the HMU • A CD containing ‐ • The RADWIN Manager software • Quick Start Guide • User Manual • Link Budget Calculator • A self‐adhesive label with the MAC address and alternative Community string. Keep this label in a safe place for future reference. • Cable glands (to be used with the HSU‐PoE cable) Mobile Subscriber Unit ‐ the HMU The RADWIN HMU is a large form factor unit as shown in Figure 4‐1. It is intended for use in railway applications, vessels and more. It uses two single pole antennas. Mobile Subscriber Unit ‐ the Vehicular Mobile Unit The Vehicular Mobile Unit is a ruggedized Mobile Radio Unit (VMU), specially designed for deployment in vehicles or in a fully outdoor environment, connecting directly to the vehicle power source. The Vehicular Mobile Unit ‐ • Communicates with RADWIN 5000 HBSs. It provides high capacity access connectivity of up to 50Mbps net aggregate throughput • Supports multi‐frequency bands from 4.9 to 6.0 GHz and complies with FCC, IC (Canada) WPC (India), MII (China) and universal regulations • Provides WiFi access point functionality that allows connectivity of multiple WiFi devices in and around the vehicle to the broadband backhaul • Incorporates built in GPS support Figure 4‐3: Vehicular Mobile Unit ‐ Front panel Figure 4‐4: Vehicular Mobile Unit ‐ Rear RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 39: Figure 4-5 Vehicular Mobile Unit - Side , Showing Mounting Ears
Mobile Subscriber Unit ‐ the Vehicular Mobile Unit Figure 4‐5: Vehicular Mobile Unit ‐ Side, showing mounting ears Figure 4‐6: Vehicular Mobile Unit ‐ Top, showing mounting ears Highlights of the Vehicular Mobile Unit • Ruggedized vehicle unit that withstands heat, cold, rain, humidity, dust and vibration • Roof‐mounted external antennas for extended range and performance • Broadband network connectivity for devices in and around the vehicle • High Capacity Mobile Unit ‐ up to 100Mbps • Wide coverage ‐ up to 10 km (6 miles) • High speed ‐ up to 250Km/h (150 miles/h) • 802.11b/g/n Access‐Point functionality for Wi‐Fi devices • Built‐in GPS for vehicle tracking and location‐based solutions • PoE 802.3af port for external powered devices, e.g. IP Camera • Connects directly to the vehicle power source • Outstanding short and constant latency • Single radio supports multiple bands • Robust and reliable operation in harsh environment and extreme temperatures • Ease of operation and maintenance RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐5...
Page 40: Figure 4-7 G B E P Oedevice
Power over Ethernet (PoE) Devices Power over Ethernet (PoE) Devices RADWIN’s Gigabit Power over Ethernet (GbE PoE) device provides data and power to RADWIN 5000 outdoor units. The PoE device is available with a variety of AC cables offering various plug types. This is the recommended PoE device for use with HBSs and HSUs. The unit comes with a VAC cable. The cable length and plug are region dependent. Figure 4‐7: GbE PoE device The Outdoor (Ruggedized) DC PoE device may be used for both the HBS and the HSUs. It does not support Gigabit performance on the HBS. Two models are available using power input of 20 to 60 VDC or 10 to 30 VDC. The unit can be installed in a vehicle using respectively 24VDC or 12VDC power circuits. Figure 4‐8: Ruggedized DC‐PoE Device IDU‐H aggregation unit The IDU‐H provides aggregation for multiple RADWIN ODUs and HBSs at a single hub site. It supports all RADWIN ODUs and features ‐ • Six PoE ports (PoE legacy mode / RADWIN PoE) • Up to 25W per PoE port • Two LAN Interfaces 10/100/1000 Mbps; auto‐negotiation • SFP Interfaces: 2 x SFP ports of 1000 Mbps (standard MSA) The IDU‐H is a 19” rack mounted, 1U and half width unit. Power feeding is 44VDC ‐ 56VDC, Dual redundant inputs through standard IDU‐C type adapters. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐6...
Page 41: Figure 4-9 Idu-H
IDU‐H aggregation unit Figure 4‐9: IDU‐H The IDU‐H package contains: • One IDU‐H • One short mounting ear • One long mounting ear • One dual connector to join two units mounted side by side • Two DC power plugs for power cables ‐ see Figure 4‐10 below Figure 4‐10: DC three pin power plug The power connectors are 3 pin in line female, with polarities (left to right) minus, ground and plus. If required, an AC/DC power adapter should be ordered separately, depending on the region. The IDU‐H may be installed in single or double configurations: Figure 4‐11: IDU‐H front view ‐ single configuration RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐7...
Page 42: Figure 4-13 External Antennas For Hbs 60
External Antennas Figure 4‐12: IDU‐H front view ‐ double configuration External Antennas HBS: Sector Antennas The HBS requires a dual pole sector antenna. Figure 4‐13: External Antennas for HBS 60°, 90° or 120° flat panel HSU: Directional Antennas HSUs may use any suitable dual pole directional antenna. Figure 4‐14: Flat Panel antenna ‐ may be external or integrated RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐8...
Page 43: Figure 4-15 Parabolic Dish External Antenna
Accessories Figure 4‐15: Parabolic Dish external antenna Figure 4‐16: Parabolic Grid external antenna Antenna Kits External antennas are available for the RADWIN 5000 HPMP radios, varying in operating frequencies, form factor, size and gain. See the RADWIN products catalog for a more detailed offering of external antennas. External A typical antenna kit contains ‐ • An antenna • Two RF cables 1.2 m (4’) long • Mounting kit Accessories Hub Site Synchronization (HSS) Unit The HSS unit synchronizes collocated ODUs to prevent self‐interference. It is particularly useful at a multi‐sector base station employing several HBSs. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐9...
Page 44 Accessories A single HSS unit supports up to ten collocated ODUs. In addition to each unit being connected to its PoE device, the collocated unit has an additional cable that is connected to the HSS Unit. The HSS Unit is a compact, weatherproof (IP67) connector box that is installed on the same mast as the ODUs. All collocated units connect to this box using an HSS cable. A variety of cables of different lengths are available for purchase. The HSS unit is supplied with ten protective covers; any port not in use must be closed with a protective cover. Figure 4‐17: HSS Interconnection Unit See Chapter 13 for further details about the use of HSS. RADWIN GSU The GPS‐based synchronization unit (GSU) is designed to handle inter‐site interferences in large‐scale deployment scenarios. The RADWIN GSU is a small form factor outdoor unit consisting of GPS antenna and a PoE device. Figure 4‐18: RADWIN GSU ‐ front and rear view. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐10...
Page 45: Figure 4-19 General Gsu Configuration Using Both Ethernet And An Hss Unit
Accessories The RADWIN GSU may be operated over Ethernet or connected to an HSS Unit using a standard HSS cable. It synchronizes the transmission timing of multiple Hub‐Sites to the same clock source thus eliminating self‐interference (see Chapter 16). Figure 4‐19: General GSU configuration using both Ethernet and an HSS unit Lightning Protector Unit (LPU) The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements. The RADWIN 5000 ODU is designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. It is designed for use with RADWIN products. Figure 4‐20: RADWIN Lightning Protector The lightning protector incorporates high‐power gas discharge tube and current transistor protection in a single protector unit. Technical specifications are listed in Appendix A. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐11...
Page 46: Tools Required For Installation
Tools required for installation Ethernet cable Repeater The RADWIN Ethernet repeater enables you to extend the PoE to ODU cable beyond the 100m limit (but no more than 200m). The unit is similar in appearance to the lightning protection device in Figure 4‐20. Its use is very simple as shown in the following schematic: Figure 4‐21: Using an Ethernet repeater with lightning protectors The Ethernet repeater cannot be used with GbE IDU‐ODU cables. Note Tools required for installation The following is a list of the equipment and materials required to install RADWIN 5000 HPMP hardware. Tools and Materials • Crimping tool for RJ‐45 (if the ODU‐PoE cable is without connectors) • Spanner/wrench 13 mm (½”) • Drill (for wall mounting only) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐12...
Page 47: Safety Practices And Provisions
Cables and connectors • Cable ties • Sealing material • Waterproofing tape such as Scotch 23 Tape ¾” wide, from 3M to ensure IP‐67 compliant protection against water and dust Cables and connectors • ODU grounding cable 10 AWG • ODU‐PoE cable (outdoor class, CAT‐5e, 4 twisted pairs, 24AWG): • Up to 100 m. for 100BaseT connection. • For a 1000BaseT connection (HBS only) use an ODU‐PoE cable no longer than 75m. For 1000BaseT, you should use RADWIN supplied ODU‐PoE cables, which guarantees 1Gb performance. RADWIN cannot guarantee 1Gb performance if you use third party cables. Note • External CAT‐5e cable diameter should be between 7‐9 mm to ensure waterproof sealing. Safety Practices and Provisions Preventing Overexposure to RF Energy To protect against overexposure to RF energy, install the ODUs so as to provide and maintain minimal separation distances from all persons. When the system is operational, avoid standing directly in front of the antenna. Strong RF fields are present when the transmitter is on. The ODU must not be deployed in a location where it is possible for people to stand or walk inadvertently in front of the antenna. Grounding All RADWIN products should be grounded during operation. In addition: • All ODUs should be earthed by a wire with diameter of at least 10 AWG. RADWIN 5000 HPMP ODUs must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user's responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70‐1984 or Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code. These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding outdoor units, masts, lead‐in wiring and discharge units. It also lays down the size of grounding ...
Page 48 Protection against Lightning • The earth lug on an IDU‐H should be connected to the protective earth at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack‐mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets. Further, you should ‐ • Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last • Never connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment • Ensure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground Protection against Lightning The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements. All RADWIN outdoor units are designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes. General • It is recommended that installation of outdoor units be contracted to a professional installer • Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, you should remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts • Use extreme care when installing antennas near power lines • Use extreme care when working at heights • When using an AC power source for RADWIN devices, always use the AC power adapter supplied by RADWIN • Use the right tools! • Do not mount an ODU upside down or horizontally. Doing this may void you product warranty. Internal ESD Protection circuits RADWIN equipment is designed to meet the ETSI/FCC/Aus/NZ/CSA EMC and Safety requirements. To fulfill these requirements, the system's Telecom lines at the ODU/PoE are ...
Page 49: Regulatory Considerations For Hsus
Regulatory Considerations for HSUs Regulatory Considerations for HSUs When installing an AC powered HSU: To maintain Overvoltage (Installation) Category II, install a suitable surge suppressor device in the branch circuit to limit expected transients to Overvoltage Category II values. The limits are based on IEC60664 and are also located in Table 2H of Warning UL60950 (for mains ≤ 150V, the transient rating is 1500V; for 150V < mains ≤ 300V, the transient rating is 2500V; and for 300V < mains ≤ 600V, the transient rating is 4000V). For operation of the RADWIN 55xx HSU under FCC/IC Regulations: When operating the device with certain 29 dBi dish antennas, the Tx power may be no more than 23 dBm in the frequency channel 5845 MHz for 5 and 10 MHz channel bandwidth. Please check with RADWIN Customer Service Caution for antenna models subject to this requirement. All other frequencies may operate using maximum Tx power of 25 dBm. Hardware Installation Workflow for a RADWIN 5000 Sector Installing the Base Station Site Survey The Site Survey is carried out as described in Chapter 3. Recall that the Site Survey has three main steps: • Stage 1: Preliminary Survey • Stage 2: Physical Survey • Stage 3: RF Survey Site preparation Site Preparation includes ‐ • Obtaining any necessary legal and statutory permits for installation of radio equipment • Clearing physical obstructions as far as possible • Erecting a mast or tower if required. A mast‐sited ODU typically uses a pole attached to the mast. •...
Page 50: Figure 4-22 Mounted Odu: Mounted To Awall
Installing the Base Station Mounting an ODU Use a mounting kit to mount an ODU on a wall or pole as shown in the following figures: • When mounting an ODU on a pole or wall, ensure that the unit is ori‐ ented so that the cable connectors are at the bottom. • Do not mount an ODU horizontally • Ensure that there are no direct obstructions in front of an integrated antenna ODU or interference from man‐made obstacles. Note • For complete instructions on using the mounting kit, see the included Quick Installation Guide. Figure 4‐22: Mounted ODU: Mounted to a wall The mounting kit has an extra arm enables the ODU to be mounted at large angles relative to the wall or pole, or to a horizontal pole, as shown: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐16...
Page 51: Figure 4-23 Mounted Odu: Large Angle To Wall
Installing the Base Station Figure 4‐23: Mounted ODU: large angle to wall Figure 4‐24: Mounted ODU: horizontal pole Mounting an HBS External Antenna The HBS requires a sector antenna. Typically, a flat panel antenna such as that show in Figure 4‐13 is used. It has four bolts for a mounting kit adapter. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐17...
Page 52: Figure 4-25 Flat Panel Antenna Mounting Kit Adapter
Installing the Base Station Figure 4‐25: Flat panel antenna mounting kit adapter It is mounted on a pole in the same manner as the HBS itself using the adapter shown in Figure 4‐25. The left hand view in shows the knurled surface adjacent to the mounting kit ear. The right hand view shows the recess for the mounting kit holding nut. Figure 4‐26: Flat Panel antenna ‐ rear with mounting kit adapter Grounding an HBS external antenna External antennas should be individually grounded using a suitable Grounding Kit such as an Andrew Type 223158‐2 (http://www.commscope.com). Grounding the HBS There is a grounding lug on the rear of the HBS as shown in Figure 4‐27. Connect it to ground using 10 AWG wire. Grounding is often carried out in conjunction with lightning protection. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐18...
Page 53 Installing the Base Station Figure 4‐27: HBS: Grounding lug Installing a PoE device The PoE device (Figure 4‐7) is a very simple piece of equipment. It has a recessed three pin AC power plug, a matching power cable, a LAN‐In port (from a switch), a LAN‐Out port (to the HBS) and a power LED, green under normal operation. It is typically strapped into a network equipment rack using plastic ties. It may also sit free on a tray or table‐top. Connecting the HBS to the PoE device Connect the HBS to the LAN‐Out port only. It will not work on the LAN‐In port. Connecting the PoE Device to a Network Connect the PoE to network equipment such as a switch from the LAN‐In port. Connecting network equipment to the LAN‐Out port may damage it. Powering up the HBS from a Poe Device Connecting the HBS port labelled IDU to a powered up PoE is sufficient. If you have not already closed and weather‐sealed the HBS IDU port, then inside it you can see an amber colored power LED which turn green when the HBS is activated. (See Chapter 5.) Mounting the Lightning Protection Units The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements. The RADWIN 5000 HPMP ODU is designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐19...
Page 54 Installing the Base Station In what follows, ODU may be any type of RADWIN outdoor radio unit and IDU may be any type of RADWIN IDU used with such products (PoEs, IDU‐H, etc). Table 4‐1: LPU Kit contents Item View/Remarks LPU (shown wrapped) U wall clamp RJ‐45 connectors (shown wrapped) 0.5m CAT‐5e cable Metal tie Quick Installation Pamphlet Guide For any type of IDU‐ODU connection, lightning protection units (LPUs) are installed in pairs, as shown in the next figure: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐20...
Page 55: Figure 4-28 Basic Use Of Lightning Protectors
Installing the Base Station Figure 4‐28: Basic use of lightning protectors  To install a LPU on a pole adjacent to an ODU (HBS or HSU): 1. Mount one LPU on the ODU pole, as close as possible to the ODU. 2. Ground the LPU to the pole using the grounding lug. 3. Connect the 0.5 meter CAT‐5e cable to the IDU port of the ODU. 4. Connect the other end of the cable to the top of the LPU. 5. Tighten the top cable LPU gland cap. 6. Connect the main ODU‐ IDU cable from the IDU to the bottom end of the LPU. 7. Tighten the bottom cable LPU gland cap. 8. Run the main ODU‐IDU cable towards the IDU location. 9. Insulate both LPU connections. See the next section, Additional Considerations for Waterproofing below. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐21...
Page 56  To install a LPU on a wall adjacent to an IDU (PoE or IDU‐H): 1. Use the supplied wall clamp to mount the second LPU as close as possible to the indoor access point to the IDU. 2. Ground the LPU to an earth strip using the grounding lug. 3. Remove the top cable LPU gland cap together with the rubber sealing tube. 4. Thread the IDU cable from the upper LPU, through the removed cap from the previous step. 5. Plug it in to the top of the LPU. 6. Screw down and tighten the LPU cap. 7. Connect the 0.5 m CAT‐5e cable to the Bottom of the LPU. 8. Connect the other end (via the indoor access point) to the IDU. 9. Insulate both LPU connections. See the next section, Additional Considerations for Waterproofing below. Additional Considerations for Waterproofing Lightning Protectors and Ethernet Repeaters If these units are installed at locations heavily exposed to heavy dust, rain or corrosive moisture (for example, close to the sea), you should protect them further as in the following procedure. In the remainder of this section, “unit” refers to either a Lightning Protection Unit or a Repeater.  To seal a unit against excessive dust and moisture: 1. Obtain a high quality sealing material such as Scotch 23 Tape ¾” wide, from 3M to ensure IP‐67 compliant protection against water and dust. 2. Cut two pieces each 25 cm long, of Scotch 23 splicing tape. Remove the plastic cover to expose the tacky side of the sealing tape as shown in Figure 4‐29. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐22...
Page 57: Figure 4-29 Exposing The Tacky Side Of The Sealing Tape
Installing the Base Station Figure 4‐29: Exposing the tacky side of the sealing tape 3. After connecting the short CAT‐5e IDU/ODU cable (provided in the box) from the ODU to the unit, tighten the cable gland cap firmly and use the insulation tape scotch 23 to fully cover both of the cable glands. 4. Connect the tape with tacky side up on the cable gland cap and the CAT‐5e cable. Start at Start Point at the bottom of the cable gland as shown in Figure 4‐30. Finish at End Point of the CAT‐5e cable, 2.5cm after the end of the shrink tubing. Stretch the tape and apply half‐overlapped to form gap‐free joint. Figure 4‐30: Start and End points for protective‐taping the unit 5. Wrap two layers of any scotch vinyl plastic electrical type (e.g Scotch Super 88 Vinyl Plastic Tape from 3M) to protect the joints as shown in Figure 4‐31. Ensure that the bottom of the cable gland and the end of the CAT‐5e cable are covered with the sealing splicing tape and with vinyl plastic tape. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐23...
Page 58: Figure 4-31 Protecting The Unit Joints With Vinyl Tape
Installing the Base Station Figure 4‐31: Protecting the unit joints with vinyl tape 6. Mount the unit on the pole using the mounting ring as shown in Figure 4‐32. Ground the unit using the GND screw. For lightning protection, repeat the same procedure to install the second unit connected to the IDU. Figure 4‐32: Mounted and strapped to the pole External Ports for CAT‐5e Cables All external HBS ports should be water sealed. Use the same materials and method as for the LPU cable glands. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐24...
Page 59 The IDU‐H: A Base Station Alternative to PoE Devices The IDU‐H: A Base Station Alternative to PoE Devices Using an IDU‐H instead of several PoE devices The IDU‐H is an aggregation switch with the functionality of six PoE devices. It is ideal for use at a base station having several collocated HSUs or RADWIN 2000 radios. Figure 4‐33: IDU‐H Installing an IDU‐H The IDU‐H can sit on a table top, but is best installed in a rack using the supplied ears as in Figure 4‐11 and Figure 4‐12. Connecting the HBS to an IDU‐H Connect the HBS IDU port to any of the six PoE ports of the IDU‐H. Connecting the IDU‐H device to a network The IDU‐H has two LAN ports, either of which may be used for network connection. Grounding and Powering Up the IDU‐H The IDU‐H has redundant power connection circuits. An enlarged view of the power connectors is shown in below: Figure 4‐34: IDU‐H power connectors, grounding lug and power plug. • For direct DC connection: The connectors are 3 pin in line female, with polarities (left to right) minus, ground, plus. • For AC connection: To avoid damage to the IDU‐H, always use an AC/DC adapter and power plug supplied by RADWIN. Ground the unit with a 10 AWG wire before applying power. Warning RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐25...
Page 60 Figure 4‐35: IDU‐H front panel The front panel is very straight forward: The SFP ports are standard. The LAN ports are Ethernet and support GbE. The six ODU WAN ports function identically to the LAN‐Out port on a PoE device. The IDU‐H LEDs Table 4‐2: IDU‐H LED Indicators Port Green Yellow WAN (2xRJ45 LEDs) Link / Activity Duplex or Port’s PoE status (configurable) LAN (2xRJ45 LEDs) Link / Activity Duplex SFP (2 panel mounted LEDs) Link / Activity Duplex Installing Fixed Subscriber Units The same considerations as for an HBS hold for the HSUs. • When mounting an HSU on a pole or wall, ensure that the unit is ori‐ ented so that the cable connectors are at the bottom. • Do not mount an HSU horizontally • For an HSU with an integrated antenna: Do not tighten the HSUto its mounting bracket until the antenna alignment process is complete. Note • Ensure that there are no direct obstructions in front of the HSU or interference from man‐made obstacles. Mounting an HSU external antenna Many of the antennas of the types shown in Figure 4‐14 to Figure 4‐16 use the standard mounting kit. Some third party antennas use pole clamps, similar to those shown below: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐26...
Page 61: Figure 4-36 Pole Clamps For External Antennas
Installing Fixed Subscriber Units Figure 4‐36: Pole clamps for external antennas Do not stand in front of a live antenna. Warning Grounding an HSU external antenna External antennas should be individually grounded using a suitable Grounding Kit such as an Andrew Type 223158‐2 (http://www.commscope.com). The same considerations as for the HBS antennas apply here. Grounding the HSU All HSUs have a grounding lug as shown in Figure 4‐37. Connect it to ground using 10 AWG wire. Grounding is often carried out in conjunction with lightning protection. Figure 4‐37: HSU: Grounding lug standard and small form factor Installing a PoE device The same considerations as for an HBS hold for the HSUs. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐27...
Page 62: Figure 4-38 Beep
Installing Fixed Subscriber Units Connecting the HSU to the Network The same considerations as for an HBS hold for the HSUs. Powering up the HSU from a PoE device The same considerations as for an HBS hold for the HSUs. Establishing a Radio Link ‐ Aligning HSUs to a HBS Use the HSUs buzzer to perform HSU antenna alignment to a HBS.  To align an HSU to its HBS: 1. Ensure that the sector antenna of the HBS is aligned precisely to the sector it is intended to cover. Use a compass and topographical maps to do this. 2. For both the HBS and HSUs: Using a coax cable with N‐Type connectors, connect the vertical polarization connector of the antenna to the ANT 1 connector of the ODU. Then, using a second coax cable with N‐Type connectors, connect the horizontal polarization connector of the antenna to the ANT 2 connector of the ODU. There is no particular reason to use ANT 1 and ANT 2 in that order: They just have to be the same for each ODU in the sector. Further, adopting a convention like “ANT 1 is always vertical” avoids mistakes across a large Note sector. 3. Ensure that power is connected to the site PoEs across the sector. An unaligned HSU starts beeping 20 seconds after power up, and continues beeping until it is aligned to the HBS. The alignment details are described in the next two steps. “Antenna” refers both to an external antenna and an integrated antenna. The two steps should be carried out for each HSU in the sector. 4. Make a horizontal sweep of 180 degrees with the HSU antenna so that the strongest signal from the HBS can be detected. 5. Slowly turn the HSU antenna back towards the position of the HBS, listening to the tone until the best signal is reached. See the following figure for audible signal variations. Figure 4‐38: Beep Sequence for antenna alignment RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐28...
Page 63: Installing A Vehicular Mobile Unit
Installing a Vehicular Mobile Unit • Three beeps and a pause is 'best signal so far' • Two beeps and a pause is 'signal quality increased' • One beep and pause is 'no change in signal' • Long beep and short pause is 'signal quality decreased' Note • One beep and a long pause is 'no air link' • Any other signal does not relate to antenna alignment 6. Secure the HSU antenna to the pole/wall. The HSU beeping will stop completely when it is configured using the RADWIN Manager. It may also be unconditionally switched off from the Manager. Note Connecting user equipment Typical user equipment includes switches and video cameras. Before connecting user equipment to the HSU through the LAN‐In port of the PoE device, ensure that it powered down. If you are using an AC HSU, you may use the PoE Out port to connect and power a video camera. Follow your camera manufacturer’s instructions scrupulously to avoid damage to your equipment. Mounting lightning protection devices The same considerations as for an HBS hold for the HSUs. Additional consideration for waterproofing Lightning Protectors and Ethernet Repeaters The same considerations as for an HBS hold for the HSUs. External Ports for CAT‐5e Cables The same considerations as for an HBS hold for the HSUs. HSU AC Power ports They should also we waterproofed in the same manner as the other ports. Installing a Vehicular Mobile Unit Scope of this Section The VMU can be installed into almost any ground vehicle. To keep this section as realistic as possible, we use as our example, installation into a private automobile. In our view, this can be the most difficult and challenging situation, due to the limited space in typical compact private vehicles.
Page 64 Unpacking the VMU Unpacking the VMU VMU Kit Contents • VMU radio Figure 4‐39: VMU radio • 1 x Power cable 7m with female 5‐ pin M12 connector and label per wire • 2 x Fuses for power and ignition Figure 4‐40: In‐line water proof fuse holder for 14AWG/20A and 12AWG/30A wiring • 1 x LAN cable 7m with female M12 connector and RJ‐45 connector • Installation kit, including: • Mechanical element for cables protection and unit deployment • 2 x Ferules • 4 x M5 Screws • 4 x M12 caps (Silicon, attached to the unit) • 5 x SMA caps (Silicon, attached to the unit) • 1 x Quick Installation Guide (pamphlet) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐30...
Page 65: Figure 4-41 Vmu Installation Schematic
Unpacking the VMU Installation Schematic Figure 4‐41: VMU installation schematic Power wiring is shown in Figure 4‐44 below. Antenna Figure 4‐42: Typical composite “Shark‐Fin” antenna, for radio broadband, WiFi and GPS Two multipurpose “shark‐fin” antennas are mounted on the rear of the vehicle roof about a meter apart. They should be ordered separately. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐31...
Page 66: Figure 4-43 Mounted Twin Shark -Fin Antennas
Motor Vehicle Power Supply Figure 4‐43: Mounted twin Shark‐Fin antennas Motor Vehicle Power Supply The VMU works with 10‐36V DC power. It may be installed without special provisions in ordinary motor vehicles using a 12V power or in heavy vehicles using 24V power. Figure 4‐44: VMU power wiring schematic RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐32...
Page 67: Installation Procedure
Installation Procedure Installation Procedure For M12 connectors, use a locking torque of 0.49Nm. Note Unpacking and Checking  For each of the items below, do the following: 1. Remove the equipment from the box. 2. Check that everything listed on the included Bill of Materials or Pro‐forma Invoice is present. 3. If any item is missing, contact Customer Service. You will be advised whether to return the package for replacement, or whether the missing item can be supplied separately. 4. Do not dispose of the packaging until the unit is installed and operational. Tools and Additional Materials • Spanner/wrench, screw drivers various (primarily for small electrical connections) • Drill • Sealing material or other waterproofing tape such as Scotch 23 Tape ¾” wide, from 3M to ensure protection against water and dust for cable entry into the vehicle. Installation Mount the VMU in a safe protected location. The ambient temperature should be in the range ‐35°C to +60°C (‐31°F to +140°F).  To prepare the vehicle for VMU installation: 1. Locate and mark the VMU in the place where you want to mount it. 2. Determine the precise location of the antennas on the roof‐top. 3. Route the cables from the vehicle battery area to the VMU location. 4. Route the cables from the antenna location to the VMU location. 5. Route the cables from the cabin PC/Camera to the VMU location.  To physically mount the VMU: 1. Place the unit against the surface to which it is to be mounted. 2. Mark the screw placements using four of the mounting holes in the unit as guides. 3. Drill holes in the surface using your marks. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐33...
Page 68 Installation 4. If the unit is mounted directly to the car chassis, use sheet metal screws and star washers. 5. If the unit is mounted on a non‐metallic surface, such as plastic or wood, use suitable screws or bands. 6. Fasten the screws to secure the unit firmly in place. 7. Connect all the interfaces to the VMU. Power should be connected last! RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 4‐34...
Page 69: Part 2: Sector Installation
Part 2: Sector Installation Release 3.5.70...
Page 70: What We Will Do Here
Chapter 5: Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager What we will do here This chapter is a quick “hands‐on” tour of a running sector. We show you how to install the RADWIN Manager software on your managing PC, connect it to an operating base station and then log on. We then explain the use of the various objects on the RADWIN Manager main window. The background acquired here will enable you to understand the direction and purpose of the detailed procedures (described in later chapters), required to build a RADWIN 5000 sector from the ground up. Installing the RADWIN Manager Application Minimum System Requirements The RADWIN Manager application is distributed on a CD. Operating system specific PC resources required by the application are set out in Table 5‐1 below: Table 5‐1: PC Requirements for the RADWIN Manager Application Windows Version Vista/7/8 XP Pro 32 bit 64 bit 512 Mb 1 Gb 2 Gb Memory P IV P IV Dual Core Processor Requirements common to all systems are: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐1...
Page 71 Installing the Software • Hard disk: 1 GB free space • Network: 10/100BaseT NIC • Graphics: 1024x768 screen resolution with 16 bit color • Any modern Web browser to view additional material, use the Web Interface or get help from the RADWIN Web site. Installing the Software Any PC running the RADWIN Manager application can be used to configure a RADWIN 5000 HPMP sector.  To install the RADWIN Manager application: 1. Insert the CD into the CD/DVD drive of your computer. 2. The CD opening window appears: 3. Choose Install RADWIN Manager and follow the on‐screen instructions of the installation wizard to complete the setup of the RADWIN Manager application. If the installation program fails to start, browse to your CD/DVD drive, chose the setup.exe program and run it. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐2...
Page 72 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager We will look at a preconfigured fixed sector, setup as follows: Table 5‐2: Preconfigured setup ‐ HBS Location Attribute Value Remark Address 10.104.50.200 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::200 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 Sector ID EBGX20560334 Inherited by all communicating fixed HSUs. Network ID Inherited by all communicating nomadic Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 and v3...
Page 73 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Table 5‐3: Preconfigured setup ‐ HSUs Location Attribute Value Remark Address 10.104.50.1 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::1 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 Contact Haydn Optional HFU.01.01 Name Haydn@HFU.01.01 Location of Contact ‐ optional Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A0003E Geographic location Latitude ‐37.89651 Longitude 145.15716...
Page 74 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Table 5‐3: Preconfigured setup ‐ HSUs (Continued) Location Attribute Value Remark Address 10.104.50.4 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::4 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 HFU.01.04 Contact Handel Optional (Used only to illustrate AES Name Handel@HFU.01.04 Location of Contact ‐ optional 265) Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A0003B Supports AES 256...
Page 75 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Table 5‐5: Preconfigured setup - one nomadic HSU Location Attribute Value Remark Address 10.104.50.3 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::3 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 HNU.01.01 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 Contact Brahms Optional Name Brahms@HNU.01.01 Location of Contact ‐ optional Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number...
Page 76: Figure 5-1 Pinging The Base Station
Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Figure 5‐1: Pinging the base station. Under IPv6. the ping will look like this: ping 2005:104:50::200 Figure 5‐2: Pinging the base station ‐ IPv6 Any other response from ping means that the HBS ODU is not responding. Check your Ethernet connection and that both the PoE and ODU are switched on and then try again. If you do not succeed, seek assistance from RADWIN Customer Service. Pinging the HSUs should yield similar responses. 3. Dismiss the command line session. 4. Open the RADWIN Manager from the desktop icon, or click Start|Programs|RADWIN Manager|RADWIN Manager. The Log‐on dialog box appears. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐7...
Page 77: The Radwin Manager Log-On Concept
The RADWIN Manager Log‐on Concept Figure 5‐3: Log‐on window ‐IPv4 Figure 5‐4: Log‐on window ‐ IPv6 The RADWIN Manager Log‐on Concept RADWIN 5000 supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 either separately or together. The log‐on procedure differs slightly between operation under SNMPv1 and SNMPv3. In what follows below, we assume that SNMPv1 is in use. In Table 5‐6 at end of the section, we show the difference between SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 at log‐on time. The RADWIN Manager provides three levels of access in one of two entry modes. To see them, click Options at any time in the Log on window (Figure 5‐3 above). You are offered an extended log‐on window: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐8...
Page 78: Figure 5-5 Extended Log - On
The RADWIN Manager Log‐on Concept Figure 5‐5: Extended log‐on window At the User Type field, click the list button: Figure 5‐6: Log on window exposing the user types. There are three user types: • An Observer has read‐only access to the sector. An Observer can monitor the sector, generate reports, but may not change any sector parameters. • An Operator can install and configure the sector. • An Installer can, in addition to functioning as an Operator, also change the operating frequency band (or regulation). The latter function has legal ramifications, requiring familiarity with local regulations. To set the SNMP version, use the Settings button in Figure 5‐5. A log‐on extension window opens: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐9...
Page 79: Figure 5-7 Log On Window
The RADWIN Manager Log‐on Concept Figure 5‐7: Log on window showing SNMP settings. You may choose the SNMP version. If your firewall blocks SNMPv3 messages and for security reasons cannot be changed them use SNMPv1. If you are using Trap Authentication, enter the User and Password. Leaving these fields blank or incorrect, will not prevent you from logging on. You will not be able to see trap messages directed to the trap message address associated with a defined user. The allocation and association of a trap address with a user is described in Chapter 8, Management. If you are connecting through the RNMS server check the RMNS connect button and enter your server IP address. The following table summarizes these options: Table 5‐6: User types, default passwords and function SNMPv1 SNMPv3 Default User Type Function Communi Default Password Community Password ty String Value Observer admin Monitoring Read‐Only public Read‐Only public Installation, Operator admin Read‐Write netman Read‐Write netman configuration Operator plus ...
Page 80: Log-On Errors And Cautions
Log‐on Errors and Cautions The Network Manager should change the default passwords as soon as possible, particularly if SNMPv3 is to be used.  Continuing the log‐on procedure: 5. If your User Type is not Operator, then choose it now. 6. Enter the password. 7. If you are a user with Read‐Write permission, click Options to enter the Community options if required. • Leave the default Community passwords, netman for read‐write, and public for read‐only. • If you are a user with read‐only permission, then you may only log on Note as Observer. Log‐on Errors and Cautions Unsupported Device Attempting to connect to an unsupported device on an otherwise valid IP address (for example, a LAN printer) will result in the following error message: Figure 5‐8: Unsupported device message Incorrect IP Address If the IP address chosen is invalid or the sector is unreachable, the following error message will be displayed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐11...
Page 81: Figure 5-9 Unreachable Device
Incorrect Password Figure 5‐9: Unreachable device message Incorrect Password If you type an incorrect password in the Login window, the following message will be displayed: Figure 5‐10: Invalid user type or password Invalid Read/Write Community String or SNMPv3 Passwords This will result in the same message as shown in Figure 5‐9.  To deal with lost or forgotten Community Strings: 1. Send an email request for to RADWIN Customer Service for an alternative key. Your email must include the ODU serial number shown on the adhesive sticker on rear of one of your ODUs. 2. The reply will contain an alternative key, which functions as a temporary master Community String. Copy/paste the supplied alternative key to both the Read‐Only and Read‐Write fields in the log‐on window (Figure 5‐5). This gets you to the RADWIN Manager main window. 3. Use the procedure on page 8‐19 to enter new Community Strings. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐12...
Page 82: Four Sector Display Views
Four Sector Display Views Four Sector Display Views Table View The RADWIN Manager offers three sector display views. The default view for a freshly installed sector is Table view and looks like this: Figure 5‐11: Default Sector display ‐ Table view RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐13...
Page 83 Table View What’s on the Cards ‐ Table View The individual HSU display boxes are called cards. They are used with small variations in the Table and Map views. fixed HSU nomadic HSU nomadic HSU placeholder Figure 5‐12: HSU Cards The card title bar holds as much of the HSU name as fits. • The IP (address) and Loc(ation) are as defined by you during Configuration or Registra‐ tion • The RSS for the HSU and HSU are shown as bar graphs for convenience. They should be balanced. If for one HSU there is a consistent imbalance of even 1dBM or intermittent imbalances of 2‐3 dBm you should check its antenna connections and perhaps the unit itself. If several HSUs are out of balance, there may be a problem with the HBS. • The Level in the nomadic HSU: There are four allowed levels (A to D) allowing a measure of prioritization of nomadic HSUs. We will see how this is done on page 6‐32. • Downlink and Uplink throughput: The green part of each bar shows the Assured throughput based on the number of time slots allocated to the HSU subject to the cur‐ rent sector traffic load. The light blue bar show the Peak throughput, again subject to traffic conditions. The peak throughput may exceed the assured throughput due to the operation of Smart Bandwidth Management (SBM), discussed in detail in Chapter 10. • The Rx and Tx rates at the bottom of the card are the Ethernet receive and transmit rates for the HSU. An extended view showing the Tx and Tx rates for the two antenna chains in also available: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐14...
Page 84: Figure 5-13 Map View Icons
Map View See Setting RADWIN Manager Preferences, Advanced below. • The little ball on the top left of each card is a status light, which will be explained in Table 5‐11 below. Map View If you have an Internet connection, you may use Map view. The map view uses distinctive icons to distinguish between different types of HSUs and the HBS: fixed HSU nomadic HSU HMU/VMU Figure 5‐13: Map view icons The green “beacon” light on top of the icons changes color according to the unit’s status. The color codes are defined in Table 5‐11 below. The default RADWIN Manager main window looks like this: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐15...
Page 85: Figure 5-14 Sector Display - D
Map View Figure 5‐14: Sector display ‐ Default Map view A new sector with default values for element map coordinates is shown centred on Greenwich (Figure 5‐14). The sector is centered on the HBS azimuth (configurable). The HSUs distributed evenly within the sector beam width (configurable) without regard for geographic considerations. If you do not have an Internet connection, the display background will be solid gray. For this demonstration, we use a sector centered on Melbourne, Australia. The location of the HBS and two fixed HSUs is based on a Radio Plan shown in Table 5‐7. The nomadic HSUs, having no predefined coordinates are distributed evenly across the sector. Later we show you how to change the positions of the HSU icons on the map. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐16...
Page 86: Figure 5-15 Sector Display - L
List View List View The List view looks like this: Figure 5‐15: Sector display ‐ List view At the bottom of the HSU display panel, there is a thin horizontal scroll bar. Use it to see further details about the displayed HSUs. The Index and Name fields are protected so you always know to which HSUs the data belongs. The status indicator ball has the same meaning as it does for the HSU cards and map icons. For details, see Table 5‐11 below. You may restrict the displayed fields to those of interest. If you right click anywhere in the list you are offered a Select Columns button: Clicking it open the filed choice menu: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐17...
Page 87 List View The grayed out items are always displayed. The other checked items are shown by default, but may be removed. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐18...
Page 88: Figure 5-16 Default Sector
Utilization View Utilization View The Utilization view shows how sector resources are allocated between HSUs. It is particularly important since the SBM mechanism can temporarily assign unused downlink time slots to a very busy HSU. It can also temporarily assign unallocated uplink time slots for the same purpose. Figure 5‐16: Default Sector display ‐ Utilization view The elements of the Utilization view are explained in detail in Chapter 10 where SBM is discussed. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐19...
Page 89: Continuing With Our Example Sector
Switching Between Views Switching Between Views  To switch between displays: • Click the relevant tab. From left to right, the tabs are, Map view, Table view, List view and Utilization view. The active tab (Table view in the illustration) is shown enlarged. Display View Persistence The last display view used will be that opened at your next restart or log on to the RADWIN Manager. Which Display View Should I Use? Your preferred view is clearly application dependent. For a geographically localized sector ‐ say, video surveillance of a plant or a sports center with a small number of cameras, Table or List view might be adequate. Our own example is based on a backhaul situation for which the Maps view is very helpful. Continuing with our Example Sector Using the Map View To set up a new sector or to carry out substantial changes to an existing sector, you should have a Radio Plan from your Site Survey. The minimum requirement is a list of locations and their coordinates. Here is our plan extracted from Table 5‐2: Table 5‐7: Radio Plan for a small sector Antenna Unit Type Site Name Latitude Longitude height (m) Mozart@HFU.01.02 ‐37.4018 145.0086 fixed HSU Haydn@HFU.01.01 ‐37.8762 145.0437 fixed HSU nomadic HSU Brahms@HNU.01.03 Bach@HBS.01 ‐37.8148...
Page 90 Using the Map View  To relocate a HBS or HSU by setting latitude and longitude coordinates: 1. Right click the HBS (Bach@HBS.01) to open its Context menu and then Configure. 2. Click the Coordinates button to open the Coordinates window and enter the required latitude and longitude. You may enter the coordinates in decimal or degrees/minutes/seconds using the input template shown below: 3. HBS only: The Azimuth and Beam Width determine the sector center‐line direction and angle They are only used for initial default distribution of HSUs on the map. 4. Click OK. The unit is moved to the new location (possibly off‐screen). 5. Repeat the previous four steps for each HSU in the sector. If at the end of the process, the HBS is off‐screen, click the Center on Sector button to “fly” to the sector. Using the example in Table 5‐7, here is the outcome: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐21...
Page 91: Figure 5-17 Selected Hbs Or
Using the Map View We have located the entire sector to Melbourne, Australia in accordance with our Radio Plan. The grey lines and icons are pre‐registered place‐holders for additional nomadic HSUs. You can make manual location adjustments using the GUI.  To relocate a HBS or HSU using the GUI: 1. Select the unit to move by clicking it. It is surrounded by a brown box. 2. Mouse‐over the top edge of the box to get a context button bar as shown in. Figure 5‐17: Selected HBS or HSU with context button bar The functions of three buttons (from left to right) are as follows: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐22...
Page 92: Figure 5-18 Map Cards
Using the Map View Table 5‐8: Unit Context Button bar functions Button Tool tip Purpose Left Show/Hide details Show/Hide the status window Unlock / Lock Item Unlock to drag on map, lock to secure position Center Show more background detail. Also displays the Zoom in Right unit status window if not already visible a. You can also zoom in/out using the mouse scroll wheel in the standard way The left details button opens a card, similar to those in Figure 5‐12:. fixed HSU nomadic HSU place holder for a nomadic Figure 5‐18: Map Cards Unlike the Table View cards, the status indicator is on the icon itself. 3. Click the Unlock button. Drag the tower icon to its new location. You must confirm the change: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐23...
Page 93: Exploring The Radwin Manager Main Window - Hbs
Exploring the RADWIN Manager Main Window ‐ HBS The change is then carried out. The foregoing change confirmation is important: There is no “undo” function. If you inadvertently move the unit to a wrong place, you will have to restore its position by hand. Note Exploring the RADWIN Manager Main Window ‐ HBS The following sections describe the panels of main window shown in Figure 5‐11. HBS Main Button Menu Figure 5‐19: HBS main button menu Table 5‐9: HBS main button bar functions Menu Item Purpose Cross Reference Monitor ‐ File location, interval and throughput units Monitor Events ‐ Color coding for events log and events log file Events Preferences location Advanced ‐ Enable/disable check for updates, Monitoring Advanced interval and timeout, map view background mode Software Upgrading an Perform software upgrade for a sector Upgrade Installed Sector SWU side Bulk Software Bulk backup of HBS and HSU software arrow Backup Get Run and store diagnostics for all or some members of a Monitoring and Diagnostics sector Diagnostics Log Off...
Page 94: Figure 5-20 Sector Status
Sector Status Panel Sector Status Panel The sector level information is shown here. There is nothing that can be changed for an active sector. The parameters are set before the base station is activated and are duplicated for each HSU in the sector. Figure 5‐20: Sector Status panel The last two items are of special interest: The Status (shown as Active) indicates whether the HBS has been activated or not. The Time Slots bars indicate how many out of 63 time slots in uplink and downlink directions, have been allocated to HSUs. Allocation of time slots between HSUs provides a basic form of prioritization between them. Normally you would not leave unallocated time slots unless you intended to add more HSUs. Every HSU requires at least one time slot. Time slot allocation is closely related to SBM performance detailed in Chapter 10. Base Station Panel The displayed items in the Base Station panel are straight forward. Figure 5‐21: Base Station detail Panel The Tx Ratio shows the allocation of throughput between downlink and uplink traffic at the HBS. Here it is set to 70% downlink and 30% uplink. The Tx Ratio is not only sector‐wide: If you use HSS (Chapter 13 ‐ Chapter 15) to collocated several HBSs (to cover adjacent sectors), they must all use the same Tx Ratio. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐25...
Page 95 Base Station Panel The Rx Rate and Tx Rate are the Ethernet traffic receive and transmit rates through the HBS under load. The button bar provides the necessary functionality to configure and manage the HBS. Table 5‐10: HBS Detail Panel button bar functions Menu Purpose Cross Reference Icon HBS Configuration Configuring a HBS Recent Events Log Recent Events Performance Monitor Performance Monitoring Active Alarms Active Alarms Spectrum View Spectrum View Throughput Checking Changing the Sector Band HSU Connection Table Deactivating the HBS a. Installer only The foregoing description relates to an activated HBS. The Detail Panel title bar for an inactive HBS looks like this: Clicking the Activate button initiates an activation Wizard. The Activate button in the title bar is hidden, leaving it looking like this: The Activation process is covered in detail in Chapter 6. At any time, the current status of the HBS is shown in the Sector Status Panel, Figure 5‐20. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐26...
Page 96: Figure 5-22 Events Log Panel
HBS Events Log HBS Events Log The Events Log records system failures, loss of synchronization, loss of signal, compatibility problems and other fault conditions and events. The foregoing event types include events from all links for which this managing computer has been defined as the traps address. Only events from RADWIN equipment will be shown. Note Alarms (traps) are displayed in the Events Log in the lower panel of the main window. The Events Log may be saved as a text file. The Events Log includes the following fields: » Sequential number (ID) » Date and time stamp » Message » Trap source » IP address of the ODU that initiated alarm. For complete information about internal traps and alarms see Chapter 12. The events are displayed in the Events Log in the lower right‐hand panel of the RADWIN Manager main window: Figure 5‐22: Events Log panel The events log provides a color coded event list. Blue items (like the one in Figure 5‐22) are informational. You can set the color coding for critical, cautionary and informational messages from the Preferences button. The Events Log is horizontally scrollable if it is too wide for your computer display. Use the top left drop‐down list to filter the messages: Figure 5‐23: Events Log filter selection RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐27...
Page 97: Figure 5-24 Hsu Card - Indicating
HBS Main Window ‐ HSUs Panel HBS Main Window ‐ HSUs Panel Table View ‐ Further details If you have a large number of HSUs in the sector, it may be helpful to filter the display. You have the following choices: The following case has colored fields indicating a problem requiring your attention: Figure 5‐24: HSU card‐ indicating a problem If you mouse‐over the colored RSS area, you will receive a tool tip telling you that RSS for Radio 1 is lower than for Radio 2, or something similar. We will provide further detail about these color codes below. Right click a HSU to get its context menu: Figure 5‐25: HSU display ‐ context menu (right click) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐28...
Page 98 HBS Main Window ‐ HSUs Panel Map View Here again is the Map view of the HBS Main Window: Figure 5‐26: HBS Main Window ‐ Map view HBS/HSU Status Lights HBS/HSU Status light appear on the tower graphic, and the HSU detail (for example, Figure 5‐24). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐29...
Page 99: Figure 5-28 Navigation Tool
The meaning of the Status lights is as follows: Table 5‐11: HBS/HSU Status light color codes Description Color Green Active Registered, in sync Inactive Registered, no sync Purple N/A Authentication error Brown Software Upgrade required Figure 5‐27: HBS/HSU Blue Belongs to another Status lights sector Static: Unregistered Gray Mobile: Not synchronized Navigation Tool bar The left hand display box shows the latitude and longitude of the point on the map under the tip of the mouse cursor. The right hand bar is the distance scale as defined by the numeric label ‐ 25 km in the example. Figure 5‐28: Navigation Tool bar Table 5‐12: Navigation tool bar button functions Menu Icon Purpose Show/Hide the HBS/HSU Status lights (Figure 5‐27) Show/Hide the HBS/HSU Status boxes Center on the sector RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐30...
Page 100 HBS Main Window ‐ HSUs Panel Table 5‐12: Navigation tool bar button functions (Continued) Menu Icon Purpose Shows different map views. Aerial View and Show Labels are set by default. Navigation buttons: Moves the sector about on the displayed map. Shows different levels of map detail The zoom item is a convenience function. The four side buttons show the detail level associated with the zoom slider position. Alternatively, you may click one of the side buttons to get directly to the indicated zoom level. The default level is “Region” corresponding roughly to an area sufficient to display the whole sector. Other Mouse Navigation Functions • Double clicking the mouse or rotating the scroll wheel forward causes the view to zoom in (become larger, more detailed) • Rotating the scroll wheel back causes the view to zoom out (become smaller, less detailed) • Moving the mouse over the map with the right button depressed drags the sector (cen‐ tered on the HBS) in the direction of movement • Right clicking anywhere on the map opens up this close to the mouse location. Clicking this button copies the mouse cursor location as a coma separated text mode latitude‐longitude pair to the clipboard. Here is a copy/ pasted example: ‐37.58896, 145.69000. The HSU Status box The following cases have colored fields indicating a problem requiring your attention: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐31...
Page 101: Figure 5-29 Hsu Status Cards
HBS Main Window ‐ HSUs Panel Figure 5‐29: HSU status cards indicating problems If you mouse‐over the colored RSS area, you will receive a tool tip telling you that RSS for Radio 1 is higher than for Radio 2, or something similar. The color codes have the following meanings: • Normal white/green together with a consistent RSS imbalance may be caused by differ‐ ent TX Power settings at each site. There is no warning indicator but it may be easily corrected using Configure| Tx & Antenna or by rerunning the Configuration wizard. • A yellow warning color will be displayed for an RSS difference of more than 8 dBm between the two polarizations on the same site (the RSS display is the combination of both polarizations on this site) • A red warning color indicates an RSS difference of more than 16 dBm between the two polarizations on the same site The latter two cases are usually the result of a physical problem at the indicated site. Probable causes are: • Interference • Antenna polarity problem • ODU malfunction This is a normal situation: Figure 5‐30: HSU status cards: Left: fixed HSU Right: nomadic HSU RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐32...
Page 102: Figure 5-31 Hsu Display
HBS Main Window ‐ HSUs Panel The arrow on the top right hand corner can be used to minimize or restore full detail. Here is the HSU status box minimized: This device is useful for a large sector with a small display. Right click an HSU image to get its context menu: Figure 5‐31: HSU display ‐ context menu (right click) List View List view functionality is obtained ny selecting a HSU and using the top button bar to configure it. Figure 5‐32: HSUs on HBS display ‐ extract. Scroll right for more HSU fields If you have a large number of HSUs in the sector, it may be helpful to filter the display. You have the following choices: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐33...
Page 103: Exploring The Radwin Manager Main Window - Hsu
Exploring the RADWIN Manager Main Window ‐ HSU The button bar in Figure 5‐32 follows the same pattern as the context menus in Figure 5‐25.. Table 5‐13: HBS main window context menu and button bar functions Menu Menu Item Purpose Cross Reference Icon Registering a fixed HSU for Register Register a HSU to a sector service Configuring an HSU from Configure Site configuration for the HSU the HBS Main Window Recent Events Recent events log per HSU Recent Events Performance Performance Monitoring per HSU Performance Monitoring Monitoring Active Alarms Display Active Alarms Active Alarms Estimate Estimate throughput per HSU Throughput Checking Throughput Service evaluation and time slot Update Service allocation per HSU; also Spatial Updating HSU Services Multiplexing/Diversity selection Suspend ... Suspend Service Suspending an HSU Replace Replace a HSU...
Page 104: Logging On To A Hsu
Logging on to a HSU Logging on to a HSU You can log on to a HSU of an established sector. The log on procedure is the same as for a HBS. Suppose we log on to HSU with IP address 10.104.50.1: We initially receive the following caution: Figure 5‐33: Logging on to a HSU Upon clicking OK to dismiss the caution, we get a variation of the previous main window: Figure 5‐34: Opening RADWIN Manager window ‐ HSU RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐35...
Page 105 Logging on to a HSU The direct log on window differs only in the bottom status bar where the Connection Mode will show Network instead of Over the air. There are several functional differences between the log on modes, which we will explain in the following chapters. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐36...
Page 106: Figure 5-35 Hsu Main Button
HSU Main Button Menu HSU Main Button Menu The HSU main button menu is similar to the HBS main button menu. The only new item is in the Configure button. Figure 5‐35: HSU main button menu Table 5‐14: HSU main button bar functions Menu Item Purpose The Configure button opens HSU site configuration. The additional functions in the detail menu work in the same way as the corresponding functions for the HBS. Configure See Software Backup and Upgrade for the fifth and sixth items. Monitor ‐ File location, interval and throughput units Events ‐ Color coding for events log and events log file location Preferences Advanced ‐ Enable/disable check for updates, Monitoring interval and timeout Get Diagnostics Run and store diagnostics for all or some members of a sector Log Off Return to log‐on window Link Budget Calculator Help right arrow Check for updates About Help Button View this User Manual RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐37...
Page 107 HSU Link Status HSU Link Status HSU Events Log The HSU events display is functionally identical to that of the HBS. HSU Link Performance For convenience The HSU Link Performance panel shows the same fields as in Figure 5‐30. For convenience we also display the corresponding parameters for the HBS. The throughput bar graphs and labels have the same meaning as the corresponding items on the HSU cards. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐38...
Page 108: Setting Radwin Manager Preferences
Setting RADWIN Manager Preferences Setting RADWIN Manager Preferences The Preferences tabs appearing on both the HBS and HSU relate entirely to the way the Manager displays certain items for the connected unit. They are completely local to the managing computer. They are also functionally very similar for both the HBS and HSUs. Each technician servicing a sector will need to set up his managing computer (typically a laptop) with his own preferences. Note Monitor Figure 5‐36: Monitor Preferences ‐ HBS RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐39...
Page 109: Figure 5-37 Monitorp
Monitor Figure 5‐37: Monitor Preferences ‐ HSU The Monitor file contains a vast amount of information and can become inordinately large very quickly. You should therefore choose a longer sampling interval if you intend to store this information for a lengthy duration. For the HBS, it will show details for the HBS itself and all registered HSUs. The KMZ button is only relevant to Mobility sectors and otherwise does nothing. For a Mobility sector it opens a standard file search dialog. If you navigate to the last saved Monitor file, it extracts GPS information for VMUs and creates a KMZ file readable by Google Earth. The latter will show you the points traversed by VMUs during the recording period. For a HSU, it will record the information just for that HSU. You should use distinctive file names for HBS and HSU Monitor files. The content of the Monitor file will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 12. The Utilization file shows the data at the requested interval appearing at the bottom of Figure 10‐4. It also can become very large very quickly. The Show IP item is useful if you are using both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. The choice of compressed addresses will drop leading zeros and use the :: notation where appropriate. For example, the expanded address, FE80:0000:0000:0000:5AFE:00AA:20A2 compresses to Fe80::5AFE:AA:20A2. Switching the Show IP and Address Format items result in immediate display updating without the ned to press OK or Apply. Note RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐40...
Page 110 Events Events Here you may choose your own color coding for the Recent Event display (see Monitoring and Diagnostics). You may also choose a location and file name for the events log for storage. These settings are again, per HBS or HSU. To avoid over‐writing, you should use file names reflecting their source ODU. The SNMPv3 User and Password are relevant if you are using SNMPv3. In this, case trap messages are keyed to the user name and password and not visible to anyone else. The preferences entered here, relate to trap messages sent to the specified user if specified or to all trap messages, otherwise. For associating a user with a trap address, see Chapter 8, Management. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐41...
Page 111: Figure 5-38 Advancedp
Advanced Advanced Figure 5‐38: Advanced Preferences ‐ HBS Figure 5‐39: Advanced Preferences ‐ HSU Change Password You may change your log‐on password here from the default, admin. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐42...
Page 112: What Comes Next
What Comes Next? Restore Alerts Many alert messages in the RADWIN Manager have an option of the form “Do not show this message again”. These alert messages can be reverted to their default state (shown) by clicking the Restore Alerts button. You will be asked to confirm: Check for Updates If you are not connected to the Internet, disable the Check for updates check box. Enable RSS Balance Indication for Mobility Checking this item places a colored rectangle around unbalanced RSS fields in card view. Enable RSS Extended View Checking this box enables an extended card in Table view. See Figure 6‐8 and Figure 9‐2. Monitoring and Timeout Intervals The monitoring interval determines the lowest interval between request to the ODU for status updates. The timeout (default 1 sec, maximum 5 sec) may have to be increased if you are on a slow network. Setting the Map View Background Mode You have a choice of two map providers, a default or a self‐chosen background. If you log on without an Internet connection, you will get a default gray background or, if you have caching enabled, your last used map. What Comes Next? The purpose of this chapter was to offer an overview of a running RADWIN 5000 a sector. The next three chapters will cover respectively, detailed sector setup considerations, sector management and monitoring and diagnostics. The foregoing background should provide sufficient “signposts” to ensure that you do not become lost in the plethora of details required to commission and manage a fully operational sector. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 5‐43...
Page 113: Chapter 6: Installing The Sector
Chapter 6: Installing the Sector Scope of this Chapter Chapter 5 offered an overview of a running Sector as motivation for the technical installation details set out below. Assuming that the Sector equipment is in place as described in earlier chapters, sector installation has two phases: • Configuring and activating the HBS • Bringing up the HSUs ‐ configuration and registration The same RADWIN Manager program is used for both the HBS and the HSUs. Much of the process is common to both types of ODU. We will cover the HBS in detail; for the HSUs we will concentrate on those items which are different. In any event, where setup procedures are common we will point them out. This chapter covers fixed and nomadic HSU configurations. Mobile HSUs are covered in Chapter 11. Concepts A HBS out of the box, must be configured with • Basic RF parameters such as frequency band, channel bandwidths and Sector ID • Networking parameters such as IP address, subnet mask and default gateway At this point, the HBS is in an inactive state, powered up, configurable but not transmitting anything. Upon activation, the HBS will commence transmitting and receiving packets related to sector management only ‐ that is no service. Activation and Deactivation are effected quite simply by clicking a toggle button. Assuming that the Sector HSUs are mounted aligned and powered up, the HSUs will discover the HBS establishing links for management only. At this point the HSUs may be managed over the air. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐1...
Page 114: Working With Nomadic Hsus
Registration of an HSU enables service traffic between the HSU and the HBS. The HBS keeps track of registered HSUs by maintaining a table of their MAC addresses. Registered fixed HSUs set an internal flag so that they cannot register simultaneously to more than one HBS. During the registration process, you assign time slots to each HSU. A total of 63 time slots are available to each HBS in each of the uplink and downlink directions, to be distributed among the HSUs in the sector. The relative number of time slots determines the relative amount of service each HSU will receive. Each HSU receives at least two time slots. To disable an HSU you must deregister it. (A suspend mechanism is also available, to suspend service on an HSU for a limited period.) For each registered HSU, you can set separately, the uplink and downlink Maximum Information Rate (MIR) in Mbps or leave it as Unlimited. You may also manage an HSU Connection table to enable and disable connectivity between HSUs in a sector. HSUs may be fixed or nomadic. The latter may be move around within and across sectors. Mobile HSUs (HMUs) may also move around within and across sectors. They are covered in Chapter 11. Working with Nomadic HSUs Each nomadic HSU is allocated to one of four HBS levels labelled A, B, C and D. Some operating parameters for each level (such as VLAN, MIR, QoS, time slots, fixed rate, Spatial Multiplexing/Diversity antenna mode) can be different for each level allowing for broad prioritization of service between different types of nomadic units. This requires that each nomadic HSU be assigned a level to join a sector. A nomadic HSU may only send and receive service traffic while stationary. A nomadic HSU detects that it is time to seek the another HBS upon sync loss. Upon entering and stopping in a new sector, it may take several seconds to establish sync with the sector HBS. Changing any of VLAN, MIR, QoS, fixed rate, Spatial Multiplexing/Diversity antenna mode for one configured HSU at a given level, changes all other HSUs at that level. If you add a new HSU to a sector (by direct connection) at a given level, at sync time, it will acquire the existing parameters for that level. Workflow In this chapter, we assume that you are familiar with the graphical user interface described in Chapter 5, including Geographic location. We will concentrate here on sector radio setup workflow. To this end, the installation will be carried out against a blank white background. At the end of the process we will complete the sector by opening the map to reflect our Geographic positioning data. Prior to commencing, you should have a written sector plan along the lines of Table 6‐2. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐2...
Page 115: Default Radwin 5000 Hpmp Settings
Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings The default settings of the RADWIN 5000 HPMP configuration parameters are listed in Table 6‐1 below. Table 6‐1: Default settings Unit Parameter Default Value IP Address 10.0.0.120 Net Mask 255.0.0.0 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Location Location Contact Person Name Contact Protocol SNMPv1 Product Factory default band dependent Channel Bandwidth 20MHz RADWIN Manager log‐on passwords Observer admin Operator admin Installer wireless Link Password wireless‐p2mp Geographic location Latitude 51.47885 Longitude 0.01060...
Page 116 Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings Table 6‐1: Default settings (Continued) Unit Parameter Default Value IP Address 10.0.0.120 Net Mask 255.0.0.0 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Location Location Contact Person Name Name Protocol SNMPv1 RADWIN Manager log‐on passwords Observer admin Operator admin Installer wireless Link Password wireless‐p2mp RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐4...
Page 117 Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings For convenience, we repeat the tables of parameters used in our demonstration sector. Parameters not listed are left at their default values: Table 6‐2: Preconfigured setup ‐ HBS Location Attribute Value Remark Address 10.104.50.200 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::200 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length...
Page 118 Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings Table 6‐3: Preconfigured setup ‐ HSUs Location Attribute Value Remark Address 10.104.50.1 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::1 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 Contact Haydn Optional HFU.01.01 Name Haydn@HFU.01.01 Location of Contact ‐ optional Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A0003E Geographic location Latitude ‐37.89651 Longitude 145.15716...
Page 119 Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings Table 6‐3: Preconfigured setup ‐ HSUs (Continued) Location Attribute Value Remark Address 10.104.50.4 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::4 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 HFU.01.04 Contact Handel Optional (Used only to illustrate AES Name Handel@HFU.01.04 Location of Contact ‐ optional 265) Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A0003B Supports AES 256...
Page 120: Configuring The Sector Out Of The Box - Ip Addresses
IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 HNU.01.01 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 Contact Brahms Optional Name Brahms@HNU.01.01 Location of Contact ‐ optional Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A0003B We have also add place‐holders for four nomadic HSUs. That is, up to four vehicles equipped to work in this way, may simultaneously enter the sector. Choose your unit locations carefully. For example, for three collocated HBSs each with 32 HSUs covering 360°, matters get out of hand very quickly if units are poorly named. They can always be identified by their IP addresses, but that is a poor substitute for effective naming. A URL‐like naming pattern based on HBS_n.HSU_y is clear and familiar to all Internet users. Keeping the names IP address independent enables you to copy the entire sector setup to a different geographic location without IP address duplication. Configuring the Sector out of the Box ‐ IP Addresses The default log‐on IP address for all ODUs in the sector is the same: 10.0.0.120, subnet mask 255.0.0.0 and default gateway 0.0.0.0. To get the process started, set up the IP address on the network card on the managing computer to something like 10.0.0.100, subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and Default Gateway 0.0.0.0. Ensure that you have a direct LAN connection to the HBS, run the RADWIN Manager and log‐ on to it. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐8...
Page 121: Figure 6-1 Logging On With
Configuring the Sector out of the Box ‐ IP Addresses Figure 6‐1: Logging on with factory default IP address Alternatively, you can log on using Local Connection without need to change your Network Interface Card address: Figure 6‐2: Logging on with Local Connection • The Local Connection method uses broadcast packets to “discover” the attached ODU • If you log on using Local Connection, but your physical connection is not local (i.e. anything other than a direct connection between the managing computer and the PoE device), then any configuration you carry out may affect other links in the network. Do not do this! • Do not carry out this procedure using a multi homed managing com‐ puter also connected to a network. It will flood the network with broadcast packets. Further, it will throw any other links on the network into Installation or Inactive mode. Warning • In any event, as a precaution, default log‐on over Local Connection is read‐only mode. Check the Read/Write enable box to carry out instal‐ lation procedures. • Network log on (IP address to the ODU) is recommended. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐9...
Page 122: The Initial Radwin Manager Main Window
Log‐On Using a IPv6 Address Log‐On Using a IPv6 Address In Management, we show how to configure the link to use IPv6 address. Logging on with an IPv6 address works as expected, however there are several caveats to its use: 1. There is no “Local Connection” under IPv6, since it does not support IPv4 style broadcast‐ ing. 2. If you are confronted with an ODU configured for IPv6 and you do not have it’s IP address, there is no simple way to log on to the unit. This is a limitation of IPv6, not the hardware. To resolve the problem, you will need to contact Customer Service. 3. To avoid this situation, use weather‐proof adhesive stickers to label each ODU with its IPv6 address. The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window Here is the initial main display using Local Connection: Figure 6‐3: Main window for un‐configured HBS ODU RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐10...
Page 123 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window Notice the red icon on the top left corner of the window. It will change to green as soon as the HBS is configured and activated. Here is the work‐flow: 4. Activate the HBS which includes setting its IP address. It will then “see” the deployed HSUs regardless of their IP address. 5. Configure the HSUs 6. Register the HSUs to the HBS for traffic 7. Complete HSU configuration including HSU Connection Table and any other required fine tuning.  To activate a HBS: 1. Click the Activate button. The Activation Wizard opens. 2. Click Next: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐11...
Page 124 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window Enter the Sector ID, Name and Location. All fields are mandatory. Here are entries in accordance with Table 6‐2. About the Sector ID: Any unregistered HSU will establish a link with the first HBS it detects and inherit the Sector ID from the HBS. As soon as the HSU is registered for service with the HBS, the HSU’s inherited Sector ID can no longer be changed while linked: It is “locked” into the HBS. This mechanism prevents an HSU close to a sector boundary from “drifting” between HBSs for adjacent sectors. Notice that the Sector ID is split into two parts as shown in the previous figure. For a network consisting of sectors with fixed HSUs only, the split is immaterial. If the sec‐ tor is part of a network having non‐fixed HSUs, then each Sector ID for each partici‐ pating sector should have the same four character Network ID. The remaining part is ignored when an HBS establishes a link with a non‐fixed HSU. This feature enables non‐fixed HSUs to establish a link with any HBS in the network. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐12...
Page 125 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window The Sector ID is split into a four character Network ID (EBGX) and the remaining part (20561334). For fixed HSUs you may ignore the split. For non‐fixed HSUs, the use of the split Sec‐ tor ID is explained on page 9‐4. Choose your Sector ID it carefully particularly if you are using collocated HBSs for extra coverage. The Sector Name and Location are convenience items but should be chosen to ensure that the sector is documented and easily identifiable in your RF planning. 3. Open the Coordinates dialog to set the location of the HBS in accordance with Table 6‐2: 4. The Link Password may also be changed by clicking Change: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐13...
Page 126 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window Full details for changing the Link Password may be found on page 8‐19. It is best left as is if there is no pressing need to change it. If you skipped an entry, it will be framed in red like this: Note 5. From the previous Activation Wizard window, click Next. Here you may enter the IP details if didn’t do it earlier. Click Next. 6. The next window is used to set the frequency and channels. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐14...
Page 127 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window The default frequency is the lowest available (5.735 GHz) in the operating band, here, 5.730 ‐ 5.845 GHz FCC/IC. 7. Click Other to see other available bands for this HBS. 8. For our purposes, we choose 5.820 GHz: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐15...
Page 128 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window right hand selector wheel Observe that the right hand spin‐wheel is no longer displayed. Had you left Other enabled, you could have chosen a frequency by working through those available in 5MHz increments. 9. Choose the required Channel Bandwidth: If your hardware supports 200 Mbps net aggregate capacity, you should chose 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth to enable it. Note 10. To use ACS, check the Automatic Channel Selection box: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐16...
Page 129 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window You can perform a customized channel selection or click Select All to check all the channel boxes as shown: Automatic channel selection at the HBS makes little sense beyond configuration time. You may leave all or several of the channels selected for now. In practice, after RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐17...
Page 130 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window having fully configured the sector you would disable all but the actual operating channel. For operation using Licensed 3.X bands under FCC part 90 subpart Z and IC RSS‐197 supporting 3.650‐3.700 GHz: The HBS does not commence any type of transmission until the Activation process is completed, in Note compliance with those regulations. 11. Click Next. The Antenna type and Tx Power window is presented: The choice of Tx Power, antenna gain and cable loss (between the radio and the antenna) determines the EIRP and is affected by such considerations as radio limita‐ tions and regulatory restrictions. Before completing antenna installation, you might like to consider the background information about setting antenna parameters, in Appendix E: When setting Required Tx Power, it is your responsibility to chose a value in compliance with your local regulations. Warning Choose your Antenna Type, Required Tx Power, Antenna Gain and Cable Loss. We will set Required Tx Power to 5 dBm for our example. Click Next. 12. The Summary window of the Wizard is displayed. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐18...
Page 131 The Initial RADWIN Manager Main Window Check that all information showed is correct and click Activate. After a few moments the sector HSUs will be displayed in the Manager HSU panel. The field‐installed HSUs appear in a Table view: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐19...
Page 132: Configuring A Fixed Hsu From The Hbs
Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS Figure 6‐4: Activated HBS recognizing installed but unconfigured HSUs If there are too many HSUs for the Table view, switch to the scrollable List view. 13. If you are using Local Connection, log out and log back in to the HBS on its IP address. At this point, you are able to configure the HSUs for service. You may have observed that operating frequency 5.735 GHz shown, is not what we chose (5.820 GHz). The HBS tries to optimize the frequency to minimize interference effects. We next configure and register the HSUs. For fixed HSUs you can do this in either order. For nomadic HSUs you must define the HSU as Nomadic prior to registration. We will show the method below. Our preference is to carry out configuration first for all HSUs. Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS The HSU activities described in this section, may be carried out any time ‐ regardless of whether or not the HSU is registered for service or not. These activities include among other things, setting the Location, Contact, Name and IP address. The procedures in this section should be carried out for each fixed HSU in the sector. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐20...
Page 133 Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS  To configure a fixed HSU from the HBS: 1. Right click an HSU to get its context menu: Figure 6‐5: HSU Context menu 2. Click Configure. The Configuration dialog is displayed. If you have not already, enter a Name Contact and Location: Location is a site name ‐ typically a building or tower name. Contact is the contact person at that Location and Name is the Contact location. It might be just a tele‐ phone number. Here are our entries: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐21...
Page 134 Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS 3. Set the Coordinates (latitude and longitude) for the HSU as shown in the Sector Plan: 4. Set the HSU Tx Power (possibly as required by regulations). Click Tx & Antenna. The following dialog is displayed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐22...
Page 135 Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS Set the Antenna Connection Type, Antenna Type, Required Tx Power, Antenna Gain and Cable Loss as required. For our example, we use external antennas, we set Tx Power to 5 dBm and the Antenna Gain to 15 dBi. If you click apply, you receive a con‐ firmation request like this: There are several variations of this message window, depending on what you change: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐23...
Page 136 Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS 5. In any event, clicking Yes results in a further message appearing: 6. Click OK. The HSU display area refreshes with the newly configured HSU in its new location in the sector. 7. Reopen the Configuration dialog for the HSU and then open the Management tab. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐24...
Page 137 Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS Change the default HSU IP Address, Subnet mask and Default Gateway as shown: 8. For now, we will leave the remaining fields. Click OK to exit the Configuration window. You will be offered a cautionary message: Click Yes. The newly entered parameters for the HSU will be displayed following the next sync loss/restore to the HSU. You can achieve the same thing by issuing a rest to the HSU from its context menu. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐25...
Page 138: Configuring A Nomadic Hsu From The Hbs
Configuring a nomadic HSU From the HBS 9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 for one more HSU. Configuring a nomadic HSU From the HBS  To configure a nomadic HSU from the HBS: 1. Carry out steps 1 to 7 as in the previous section for a fixed HSU. 2. Open the Nomadic tab: 3. From the Type list, choose Nomadic. The right hand Level list is enabled: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐26...
Page 139: Registering A Fixed Hsu For Service
Registering a fixed HSU for service 4. The four levels enable you to split nomadic HSUs into up to four service groups with (for example) different QoS parameters. Choose level A and then OK. The number of time slots allocated to the HSU will be updated during the registration process. You are offered the following confirmation message: The HSU no longer appears on the HBS Table view. It will return following registra‐ tion, to which we now turn. Registering a fixed HSU for service We continue our illustration using the HSU, HFU.10.101.  To register an fixed HSU for service: 1. Right click a fixed HSU to get its context menu: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐27...
Page 140 Registering a fixed HSU for service 2. Click Register... If you did not configure the antenna type for the HSU, you are asked to do so now: Choose the required type and click OK. The Registration window opens: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐28...
Page 141 Registering a fixed HSU for service 3. You may edit or add the site Name, Location and Coordinates. 4. If you are using Dual Antennas, you may check a MIMO Mode: Spatial Multiplexing (default) splits the data in to two streams on transmission and recombines it on reception providing maximum throughput. Diversity transmits the same data on from both antennas and check for correctness on reception. The choice is HSU specific. For further details about MIMO antenna modes, see Appendix E. 5. Click the Evaluate button. Service evaluation takes a few seconds during which the window is darkened and inactive. Upon completion you may assign time slots to the HSU: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐29...
Page 142 Registering a fixed HSU for service Figure 6‐6: HSU Registration dialog Notice that the Evaluating activity icon continues to rotate after completion of the evaluation. The Manager maintains dynamic monitoring of the sector for injection into the sector of HSUs elsewhere and accordingly reduces the available time slots. 6. Use the sliders to choose the number of time downlink and uplink slots to be allocated to the HSU. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐30...
Page 143: Figure 6-7 Two Registered Hsu
Registering a fixed HSU for service The time slot allocations may be changed later. 7. Use the sliders to set Uplink and Downlink Maximum Information Rate (MIR). You may defer this and carry it out using the HSU Configure option. The MIR acts as a “throttle”. 8. Click Register it to complete the process. Here is the result for our example: Figure 6‐7: Two registered HSU cards ‐ medium view If you enabled RSS Extended View in Preferences (see Enable RSS Extended View), then the display looks like this: Figure 6‐8: Two registered HSU cards ‐ extended view RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐31...
Page 144: Registering A Nomadic Hsu For Service
Registering a nomadic HSU for service Observe that the registered HSU icon LED is now green and that the time slots bar on the left reflects the proportion of uplink and downlink time slots allocated. 9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 for other fixed HSUs. Registering a nomadic HSU for service Although we only have one nomadic HSU in our demonstration sector, in practice we would make provision for a larger number to enable movement between sectors. By way of example, we will pre‐register four HSU slots to levels A, B and C and time slots to each level as shown:  To configure nomadic HSUs from the HBS: 1. Open the HBS Configuration window and then its Nomadic Tab: Figure 6‐9: HBS Nomadic Configuration RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐32...
Page 145: Figure 6-10 Fully Functional
The Final Outcome 2. In the Add Devices window, click the Add spin wheel buttons and the time slots spin‐ wheels as shown. 3. Click the Register button to register the HSUs. Note that you may use the bottom dialog to save or upload a saved HBS configuration. We will demonstrate uploading a saved configuration at the end of this chapter. 4. Exit the Configuration dialog. The Final Outcome Here is the outcome for our example: Figure 6‐10: Fully functional mixed fixed and nomadic sector ‐ Table view RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐33...
Page 146: Figure 6-11 Fully Functional
The Final Outcome If you have too many HSUs to fit the table view, you can get a reduced table view by using the right hand HSU button: Figure 6‐10 looks like this: Here is a Map view of the sector: Figure 6‐11: Fully functional mixed fixed and nomadic sector ‐ Map view RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐34...
Page 147: Choosing Diversity Antenna Mode During Registration
Choosing Diversity Antenna Mode During Registration You may now carry out any other adjustments to the HSUs from the HBS or by direct connection. Notice that we adjusted the Tx Power for all elements in the sector to keep the RSS at a reasonable level. As a partial alternative method, you may enter the HSU Name and Location fields during Registration. If you do not see the changes as shown, a hard reset of the HSUs will cause them to appear. Note Choosing Diversity Antenna Mode During Registration Suppose that in Figure 6‐10 for HFU.10.101 we had chosen Diversity mode, the outcome would look like this: The assured throughput in both directions on this HSU has dropped to about half of its previous value. (The Rx and Tx rates drop slightly. The reason that there is no significant change to the Rx and Tx rates is that the SBM mechanism is allocating additional time slots in both directions. See Chapter 10 for details about the operation of SBM.) The other HSUs are left unchanged. This underlines the flexibility of the RADWIN 5000 system which enables HSUs to be independently configured depending on their particular location. Deactivating the HBS From the HBS button bar, click the right hand button followed by Deactivate. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐35...
Page 148 Deactivating the HBS You are offered a cautionary message: If you proceed, the HBS display will change to reflect the deactivated state: Notice that the HSUs remain registered, and will return to full service after the HBS is re‐ activated. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐36...
Page 149: Deregistering An Hsu
Deregistering an HSU Deregistering an HSU A HSU may be deregistered by using the Deregister entry in an HSU context menu or using the button from an HSU button bar. Where has my HSU gone? Suppose that you installed two collocated HBSs with contiguous sectors. It is possible that an HSU located close to the common sector boundary may “discover” the wrong HBS. A HSU can be “forced” across to another HBS by changing its Sector ID to that of the required HBS. The method for doing this is covered in Chapter 9. Saving the HBS Settings for Reuse as a Template Refer to Figure 6‐9 of which the following is an excerpt: Following any further fine tuning, open up the HBS Nomadic tab, and click Save. You are offered the standard Save File dialog. Save the HBS Nomadic settings file (MobilitySettings.mob) to a convenient location. For our example we changed the file name to NomadicSettings.mob. Creating Nomadic Entries for a Sector from a HBS Template The saved settings file may be used as a template for further sectors.  To create a sector from a HBS Nomadic settings file: 1. Starting with a new HBS and HSUs, log on to the HBS. 2. Activate the HBS in the usual way. 3. Open the Nomadic tab in the Configuration window. In the Save / Upload Settings window, click Upload.* RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐37...
Page 150: Figure 6-12 Preparing To
Creating Nomadic Entries for a Sector from a HBS Template Figure 6‐12: Preparing to upload the Nomadic file 4. In our case we have one HBS, so it is sufficient to enter the Nomadic file as shown and then click Start. After a few moments, the Status field indicates Done. The result is as expected: Notice that our one “real” nomadic HSU has come up configured and registered. The fixed HSUs must be registered by hand. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐38...
Page 151 Creating Nomadic Entries for a Sector from a HBS Template  To create a sector from a HBS IP list and a Nomadic settings file: 1. In the window of Figure 6‐12, enter a HBS list file. The format of the file is lines of <IP address> <Read‐Write community> For example, 10.104.50.200 netman All of the HBSs need to activated and accessible (via a switch) to the managing com‐ puter. They need not be on the same sub‐net. Alternatively, enter them one by one using the Plus button. Any un‐activated HBSs will be shown as unavailable: 2. Make any further changes to the displayed list using the Plus/Minus buttons. 3. Click Start to commence the process. 4. The list window will indicate the success or otherwise of the upload for each HBS. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 6‐39...
Page 152: Chapter 7: Operating Under The Fcc Unrestricted Contention Based Protocol
Chapter 7: Operating Under the FCC Unrestricted Contention Based Protocol Scope of this Chapter This chapter explains how to set up a RADWIN 5000 sector operating under the FCC Unrestricted Contention Based Protocol (UCBP) in the 3.650‐3.7GHz band The detailed technical operation of the protocol is beyond the scope of this manual. A variety of publications on the subject are available from the relevant FCC Web site, http:// wireless.fcc.gov/services/index.htm?job=service_home&id=3650_3700. See also, http:// hraunfoss.fcc.gov/edocs_public/attachmatch/FCC‐05‐56A1.pdf. Bringing up a Sector The HBS for FCC UCBP is pre‐configured for this regulation only. Activation is the same as for other RADWIN 5000 products. Following activation, the HBS will find its HSUs in the usual way.The only additional requirements are two extra parameters to be set in the Configuration Air Interface tab: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 7‐1...
Page 153: Hsu Operation
HSU Operation Figure 7‐1: Air Interface Tab for FCC UCBP The Maximum Throughput Mode is irrelevant here and should be left as is. The Sharing Percentage, (between 15 ‐ 75%, default 50%) is the maximum capacity the HBS is prepared to relinquish in favour of other transmitters on this band. (There may be several.) The Minimal Contention slot length (5 ‐ 20ms, default 10ms) is the amount of time the HBS is prepared to wait to check again for channel availability ‐ and if still not available, to transmit regardless. Basically the idea is this: Suppose that the HBS is set to Sharing Percentage of say 20% and Minimum Contention Slot length of 10 ms as shown. It says, “I am prepared to be polite and relinquish up to 20% of my capacity but I will butt in and transmit a burst from 10ms after interference detection.” The remaining tabs work as expected. HSU Operation Since the HSUs take their cue from the HBS in respect of air interface parameters, nothing special is required in their configuration and time slot allocation. Older model HSUs RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 7‐2...
Page 154 HSU Operation configured for the 3.650‐3.7GHz band should work correctly ‐ but you should check with RADWIN Customer Service before using them for UCBP. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 7‐3...
Page 155: Part 3: Sector Management
Part 3: Sector Management Release 3.5.70...
Page 156: Chapter 8: Managing The Sector
Chapter 8: Managing the Sector Scope of this Chapter This chapter deals with managing the sector from the HBS. It covers HBS Configuration and HSU Configuration from the HBS. HSU direct or over‐the‐air configuration is a little different and is covered in Chapter 9. A Configuration window is available for both the HBS and the HSUs to change setting without necessarily dropping service. Nevertheless care must be exercised when changing them. By way of example, changing antenna parameters for a HSU results in a HSU reset. It is necessary however to have this function in the Configuration window since it is required to initially set up the unit. The HBS itself may be configured over‐the‐air: A scenario for this is where the sector is back‐ hauled by on of the HSUs. There are no significant differences between the two methods, however some care is required. If for example, you deactivate the HBS over‐the‐air, you will lock yourself out of the sector. Running Spectrum View from the HBS manager over‐the‐air, will lock you out for the duration of the Spectrum View timeout period. Configuring a HBS Configuration Menu Buttons Open the Configuration window. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐1...
Page 157 System The Backup and Restore buttons provide for backup and restore of the HBS software. A backup (full or configuration) may be restored to another HBS provided that the product IDs and revision levels of the source and target HBSs are identical. They are shown in the HBS Inventory window. In addition, the supported bands and AES version (128 or 256) must be the Note same for the source and restored HBSs. The Refresh button restores the current window to its previous state abandoning any changes you made, provided that you did not click Apply or OK. We will work through each of the Configuration tabs in turn with emphasis on tabs or features not encountered in the previous chapters. System These items are convenience fields. Name and Location are typically entered during HBS activation. You may like to change Contact here, not set during activation. The Coordinates button opens the same window as used during activation. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐2...
Page 158 Air Interface Air Interface This panel has similar functionality as the corresponding window in the Activation Wizard (see Chapter 6). Changing the Sector ID will “percolate” to all registered HSUs. It will of course, be “picked up” by newly installed and registered HSUs. • The only way to change the Operating Channel is by deactivation and reactivation. • Channel Bandwidth and Channel Selection changes will all be sector‐wide. • Use of Automatic Channel Selection only makes sense at configuration time. Choose a single channel based on what ACS shows. Use the Spectrum View tool (Chapter 24) to help you make your choice. The Advanced bar (shown open) enables you to choose Throughput Mode that determines how the Adaptive Modulation mechanism works. Maximum Throughput (default) should be chosen if throughput is more important than higher delay. Conversely, Reduced Latency minimizes delay at the expense of lower throughput. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐3...
Page 159 Tx and Antenna Tx and Antenna This tab is available for both the HBS and HSUs. It has the same meaning in both cases. For the HBS, changes made here may affect link quality and in the case of antenna type, cause a sector re‐sync. Changing the antenna type for an HSU will cause a re‐sync to that site only. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐4...
Page 160 Hub Site Sync [HSS] Hub Site Sync [HSS] The External Pulses which might be detected, may come from a collocated HBS, a RADWIN 2000 ODU or a RADWIN GSU configured as Hub Sync Master. To enable HSS, check the Enabled check box. Ensure that the correct Operational state is selected ‐ in our example, Hub Site Client ‐ Continue Tx. Click Apply or OK to enable HSS. HSS support for RADWIN 5000 HBSs is model dependent Note RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐5...
Page 161 Management See Hub Site Synchronization for further detail about HSS. Management If you set the IP and related addresses correctly, there should be little to change here. IP Version You may configure a link for IPv4, IPv6 or both: Here we choose both and enter the IPv6 addresses: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐6...
Page 162 Management Using both IP versions is useful in conjunction with applications that do not fully support IPv6. Here are the results of setting IPv6 addresses for both sites and enabling Show IP to IPv6 in Preferences | Monitor: The three sub‐windows, Trap Destinations, VLAN Management and Protocol dialogs are generic to the HBS nad the HSUs (direct or over‐the‐air) and are discussed below. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐7...
Page 163 Management Trap Destinations  To change a trap IP address: 1. Open an entry with its edit button: The following entry window is displayed: 2. Enter the Trap Destination IP Address and Port. It could be the IP address of the managing computer. The events log will be stored at the addresses chosen. 3. For Security model you may choose between SNMPv1 or SNMPv3. The choice is site dependent. If you choose SNMPv1, you may only enter an IP address and port number. For SNMPv3, you should supply a user name and password: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐8...
Page 164 Management 4. Click OK to save your choice. Note that for each active trap destination, the Clear Trap Destination button is enabled: VLAN for Management Management VLAN Configuration Figure 8‐1: VLAN for Management VLAN IDs are used by RADWIN products in three separate contexts: Management VLAN, Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring. It is recommended that you use different VLAN IDs for each context. Caution VLAN Management enables separation of user traffic from management traffic whenever such separation is required. It is recommended that each member of a sector be configured with different VLAN IDs for management traffic. (This reduces your chances of accidentally locking yourself out of the sector.)  To enable VLAN for management: 1. In the window of Figure 8‐1, check the Enabled box. 2. Enter a VLAN ID. Its value should be between 2 and 4094. After entering the VLAN ID, only packets with the specified VLAN ID are processed for management purposes by the HBS/HSU ODU. This includes all the protocols sup‐ ported by the ODU (ICMP, SNMP, Telnet and NTP). Using VLAN for management traf‐ fic affects all types of management connections (local, network and over the air). 3. Enter a Priority number between 0 and 7. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐9...
Page 165 Management The VLAN priority is used for the traffic sent from the ODU to the managing com‐ puter. 4. Change the VLAN ID and Priority of the managing computer NIC to be the same as those of steps 2 and 3 respectively. 5. Click Apply or OK. Lost or forgotten VLAN ID If the VLAN ID is forgotten or there is no VLAN traffic connected to the ODU, then reset the relevant ODU. During the first two minutes of connection, the ODU uses management packets both with and without VLAN. You may use this period to reconfigure the VLAN ID and priority. Supported Protocols Supported protocols are shown in Figure 8‐2: Figure 8‐2: Supported protocols SNMP support is permanently enabled. You may choose between SNMPv1, SNMPv3 or both. If you choose SNMPv3, you will be offered the following cautionary message: For a sector managed as part of a network, direct access to a HBS/HSU using Telnet is considered to be a security breach. Telnet access may be enabled or disabled by clicking the Protocol tab and enabling/disabling Telnet access using the Telnet check‐box. Similar considerations apply to access via the Web Interface. • For further details about Telnet access see page 8‐56. • For further details about the Web Interface, see Chapter 25. Telnet and Web Interface access modes when available, are site specific. If for example, you want Telnet access from specific sector members, you should enable it for these sites and disable it elsewhere. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐10...
Page 166 Management Conversely, If the Telnet or Web Interface access modes pose a general security risk, you must disable them for each sector member separately. Multiuser Support under SNMPv3 If you chose SNMPv3 or both versions, you are asked to log on again: For the first log‐on under SNMPv3, use as password, the User Name, admin. There is one change to the main window. The title bar now shows the SNMPCv3 user name: Further, there is an additional button, SNMPv3 Users, in the Management window: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐11...
Page 167 Management Using the new button opens up the following entry list: To make any of the following changes, you must be logged on as user admin. The SNMPv3 passwords for admin and operator are as follows: Table 8‐1: SNMPv3 predefined users User Name Password Profile admin netwireless Read Write operator netpublic Read Only  To add an SNMPv3 user: 1. Click the right hand edit icon on any empty line of the list: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐12...
Page 168 Management 2. An Edit window is displayed: Figure 8‐3: Add or Edit a user 3. Enter a user name and password. Confirm the password as indicated. 4. Choose a Profile: • Read Only provides Observer level log‐on access. • Read Write provides Operator level log‐on access • Disabled stores the user details in the data base for future use. It must be changed to Read Only or Read Write to become usable. 5. Click OK to accept. Here is the result of adding one more Read Write user, one Read Only User and one “Disabled” user: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐13...
Page 169 Management Figure 8‐4: SNMPv3 users list  To edit an existing user: 1. Use the same procedure as above to choose a user for editing. For illustration, we will correct the spelling of Teleman’s name: 2. Click the edit button: 3. Correct the spelling of the name: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐14...
Page 170 Management 4. Enter and confirm the user’s password: 5. Click OK to finish. The change will be reflected in the display of Figure 8‐4. 6. Use the same method to change the user’s profile. Passwords are never displayed as clear text. If a user looses his password, the only way that the situation can be corrected is to delete the user name and re‐create the same user name with another password. Note Logging on as a SNMPv3 User  To log off as user admin and log on as a Read Write profile user (Vivaldi): 1. Here is the default log‐on dialog: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐15...
Page 171 Management Figure 8‐5: Default SNMPv3 log‐on dialog 2. In the right hand window, enter the user name (Vivaldi) and password. 3. For a Read Write profile user, you may log on as any user type (Observer, Operator, Installer). For example, log on Vivaldi as Operator. Since Vivaldi belongs to the Read Write profile, in the left hand window, use admin for the Password and leave User Type as is. (If necessary, you can use wireless and Installer, respectively.) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐16...
Page 172 Management In the main window we see the user name in the title bar:  To log on as a Read Only profile user (Handel): 1. In Figure 8‐5, log on as Handel instead of Vivaldi. 2. On the left hand side, set user type to Installer and password to wireless. In the main window we see the user name in the title bar as follows: The rule is, that the logged on privilege level will be the lowest of the SNMPv3 user type and the RADWIN Manager user type. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐17...
Page 173 Inventory Inventory You might like to capture or copy the information here: The Inventory information will be required by Customer Service should you require assistance. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐18...
Page 174 Security Security This section applies to both the HBS and HSUs unless stated otherwise. Figure 8‐6: Sector Security settings The Security dialog enables you to change the Link Password and the SNMP Community strings. If you have AES 256 Encryption support, the check box will be enabled at the HBS. This item does not appear on the HSU Configuration panel at all. For details about configuring and using AES 256, see Configuring AES 256 Encryption Support. Changing the Link Password This item is available as follows: • At an isolated HBS (No active HSUs) • At an isolated HSU • Never for an active HSU Here are the details: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐19...
Page 175 Security The default password is wireless‐p2mp. Optionally, you can change the link password as explained here.  To change the link password: 1. Open the Security tab (Figure 8‐6). The Change Link Password dialog box opens. Use the Hide characters check box for maximum security Note Figure 8‐7: Change Link Password dialog box 2. Enter the current link password (The default link password for a new ODU is wireless‐ p2mp). If you have forgotten the Link Password, click the Forgotten Link Password button. The following window is displayed: Figure 8‐8: Lost or forgotten Link Password recovery Follow the instructions to use the Alternative Link Password, and click OK to finish. You are returned to the window in Figure 8‐7 above. Continue with the next step. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐20...
Page 176 Security 3. Enter a new password. 4. Retype the new password in the Confirm field. 5. Click OK. 6. Click Yes when asked if you want to change the link password. 7. Click OK at the Password changed success message. • A link password must contain at least eight but no more than 16 char‐ acters excluding SPACE, TAB, and any of “>#@|*?;.” • Restoring Factory Defaults returns the Link Password to wireless‐ Note p2mp. RADWIN Manager Community Strings In this section, “ODU” may be either an HBS or an HSU. Note The ODU communicates with the RADWIN Manager using the SNMPv1 or SNMPv3 protocol. The SNMPv1 protocol defines three types of communities: • Read‐Only for retrieving information from the ODU • Read‐Write to configure and control the ODU • Trap used by the ODU to issue traps. The Community string must be entered at log on. You must know the password and the correct Community string to gain access to the system. You may have read‐only privileges. It is not possible to manage the ODU if the read‐write or the read Community values are forgotten. A new Community value may be obtained from RADWIN Customer Service for the purpose of setting new Community. You must also have available the serial number or the MAC address of the ODU. The read‐write Community strings and read‐only Community strings have a minimum of five alphanumeric characters. (bru1 and bru4097 are not permitted). Changing the trap Community is optional and is done by clicking the check box. Editing SNMPv1 Community Strings When editing these strings, both read‐write and read‐only communities must be defined. Upon logging on for the first time, use the following as the current Community: • For Read‐Write Community, use netman. • For Read‐Only Community, use public.
Page 177 Security 2. Choose the communities to be changed by clicking the check box. 3. Type the new Community string and re‐type to confirm. A community string must contain at least five and no more than 32 characters excluding SPACE, TAB, and any of “>#@|*?;." 4. Click OK to save. Editing SNMPv3 Passwords To commence the process, you must enter the current Read‐Write Community password as shown in the first field of Figure 8‐9 below. Change the Read‐Write an d Read‐Only passwords as indicated. A password must be between 8 and 31 characters long. The same character restrictions for the SNMPv1 community strings also apply here. Figure 8‐9: Changing the Community Strings/Passwords Forgotten SNMPv1 Community String If the read‐write Community string is unknown, an alternative Community key can be used. The alternative Community key is unique per ODU and can be used only to change the Community strings. The alternative Community key is supplied with the product, and should be kept in a safe place. If both the read‐write Community and the alternative Community key are unavailable, then an alternative Community key can be obtained from RADWIN Customer Service using the ODU serial number or MAC address. The serial number is located on the product label. The serial number and the MAC address are displayed in the Site Configuration inventory tab. When you have the alternative Community key, click the Forgot Community button and enter the Alternative Community key (Figure 8‐10). Then change the read‐write Community string. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐22...
Page 178 Date and Time Figure 8‐10: Alternative Community Dialog box Date and Time Setting the Date and Time The ODU maintains a date and time. The date and time should be synchronized with any Network Time Protocol (NTP) version 3 compatible server. During power‐up the ODU attempts to configure the initial date and time using an NTP Server. If the server IP address is not configured or is not reachable, a default time is set. When configuring the NTP Server IP address, you should also configure the offset from the Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). If there is no server available, you can either set the date and time, or you can set it to use the date and time from the managing computer. Note that manual setting is not recommended since it will be overridden by a reset, power up, or synchronization with an NTP Server. The NTP uses UDP port 123. If a fire wall is configured between the ODU and the NTP Server this port must be opened. It can take up to 8 minutes for the NTP to synchronize the ODU date and Note time.  To set the date and time: 1. Determine the IP address of the NTP server to be used. 2. Test it for connectivity using the command (Windows XP and 7), for example: w32tm /stripchart /computer:216.218.192.202 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐23...
Page 179 Date and Time Figure 8‐11: Date and Time Configuration 3. If entering an IP address for the NTP Server, click Clear, and then enter the new address. 4. Set your site Offset value in minutes ahead or behind GMT 5. To manually set the date and time, click Change and edit the new values. 1. Greenwich Mean Time RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐24...
Page 180 Ethernet Service Configuration Figure 8‐12: Change Date and Time 6. Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog. Ethernet Service Configuration Figure 8‐13: Setting Ethernet services RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐25...
Page 181 Ethernet Service Configuration HBS Aging Time The HBS works in Bridge Mode. In Bridge mode the ODU performs both learning and aging, forwarding only relevant packets over the sector. The aging time of the ODU is by default, 300 seconds. Ethernet Ports Configuration The ODU Ethernet port mode is configurable for line speed (10/100/1000BaseT) and duplex mode (half or full duplex). Line speed 1000BaseT is only available if the HBS is connected to A GbE PoE device. An Auto Detect feature is provided, whereby the line speed and duplex mode are detected automatically using auto‐negotiation. Use manual configuration when attached external equipment does not support auto‐negotiation. The default setting is Auto Detect. The icon next to the CRC error count may be clicked to reset the counter to zero. You should not reconfigure the port that is used for the managing computer connection, since a wrong configuration can cause a management disconnection or Ethernet services interruption. Caution  To configure the Ethernet Mode: • In the Ethernet Ports Configuration pane, use the drop‐down menu to choose the required mode. Transmission Ratio (Tx Ratio, Asymmetric Allocation)) The Transmission Ratio shows the allocation of throughput between downlink and uplink traffic at the HBS. The Transmission Ratio is not only sector‐wide: If you use HSS (Chapter 13) to collocated several HBSs (to cover adjacent sectors), they must all use the same Transmission Ratio. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐26...
Page 182 Ethernet Service Configuration Figure 8‐14: HBS Collocated client or independent unit If it is an HSS master, you will see something like this: Figure 8‐15: HBS Collocated master Moving the slider to the right in stages, yields the following: The effective available range for Asymmetric allocation is determined by channel bandwidth as shown as well as link distance. In this context, “link” is a collocated HBS or RADWIN 2000 ODU. QoS Configuration To install and use the Ethernet QoS feature, see Chapter 21. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐27...
Page 183 Nomadic Advanced: Broadcast/Multicast Flooding Protection Broadcast/Multicast Flooding Protection provides a measure of protection by limiting multicast and broadcast packets to mo more than 12.5% of available capacity. You may wish to un‐check this item if your application is based on multicast/broadcast packets ‐ for example, video surveillance using multicast downlink, or video conferencing using multicast uplink. Nomadic See page 6‐27. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐28...
Page 184 Operations Operations This section applies to both HBSs and HSUs. Reverting to Factory Settings Figure 8‐16: Restore Factory Settings and License Activation Clicking the Restore Defaults button opens the following self explanatory dialog: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐29...
Page 185: Hsu Connection Table
Advanced: False Radar Mitigation for HBS License Activation You may add additional bands or capacity using the license Activation facility. Additional bands (if available) are obtained using the Change Band function, described below. Capacity upgrade is described in Chapter 22. For a single band, just enter the supplied license Key and click Activate. If you have a list of them (a text file) you will need to use the License File option. In some instances it may involve purchasing the relevant license from RADWIN. You should contact Customer Service for details. You will find the technical steps required to obtain and install extra bands on page 8‐51. Advanced: False Radar Mitigation for HBS This tab is only visible if • You are using a Regulation requiring Radar Channel Avoidance and • You are logged on as Installer For this release, this feature at the HBS, is only relevant to the 5.3 GHz ETSI band. Configuration of False Radar Mitigation is covered in Chapter 19. HSU Connection Table From the HBS button bar, click the right hand button followed by HSU Connection Table. The following table is displayed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐30...
Page 186: Configuring An Hsu From The Hbs Main Window
Configuring an HSU from the HBS Main Window Figure 8‐17: HSU Intercommunication ‐ Connection Table The green shaded squares show intercommunicating elements within the sector. MNG refers to management traffic which should always be open between HSUs and the HBS. LAN refers to service traffic between the HBS and the HSUs. As shown, the two HSUs may not communicate between themselves. Clicking the top white square would enable communication (via the HBS) between them. You may in fact disable all traffic between the HBS and the HSUs and restore it using this device. Configuring an HSU from the HBS Main Window Right click an HSU for its context menu and click Configure to open the HSU Configuration window. Configuration Menu Buttons RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐31...
Page 187 Configuration Menu Buttons The Backup and Restore buttons have the same functionality as the corresponding buttons for the HBS. They provide for backup and restore of the HSU software. A backup (full or configuration) may be restored top another HSU provided that the product IDs and revision levels of the source and target HSUs are identical. In addition, the capacity and supported bands must be the same for the Note source and restored HSUs. The Buzzer button may set or mute the buzzer. The Auto position means that the Buzzer will give the beeps shown in Figure 4‐38 during installation or upon sync loss. The Advanced Auto position means that in addition, the buzzer will beep continuously at different rates upon sync loss, antenna mis‐alignment and other events for up to two minutes following restoration of sync. Recall that the main use of the buzzer tone is for HSU antenna alignment. The Refresh button restores the current window to its previous state abandoning any changes you made, provided that you did not click Apply or OK. We will work through each of the Configuration tabs in turn: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐32...
Page 188 System System Figure 8‐18: HSU Configuration window (HBS) These items are convenience fields. They are typically entered during registration. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐33...
Page 189 Tx & Antenna Tx & Antenna Figure 8‐19: HSU Configuration ‐ Setting antenna type and parameters The remarks about changing the HBS parameters also apply here. Changing the antenna type will cause a re‐sync between the HSU and the HBS. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐34...
Page 190 Management Management Figure 8‐20: HSU Configuration ‐ IP addresses The functionality is identical as that for the HBS. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐35...
Page 191 Inventory Inventory You should note the details for each HSU. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐36...
Page 192 Security Security You may change the SNMP community strings only for the HSU from here. You cannot change the Link password from an HSU. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐37...
Page 193 Date & Time Date & Time The functionality is identical as that for the HBS. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐38...
Page 194 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet configuration for a HSU follows the same general pattern as the corresponding tab for the HBS but with important differences. Ethernet Ports Configuration This item is same for all PoE powered HSUs and the HBS. See page 8‐26. For the SU2‐ACs (AC powered HSUs) Ethernet Ports Configuration panel is different: The ODU entry is disabled; only the LAN and PoE (out) ports are available for configuration: The LAN port has these options: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐39...
Page 195 Ethernet The PoE port offers the following options: Typically, a video camera is attached to the PoE port. The last two option provide basic camera management functions. The button next to the POE label offers basic PoE performance information: Maximum Information Rate The Maximum Information Rate (MIR) was initially set during HSU Registration. You may change it here. If you change it, the HSU card display changes. Here is an example using HSU Mozart@HFU.01.02: The card changes as follows: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐40...
Page 196 Nomadic Notice the left hand orange bars indicating the Downlink and Uplink MIR and the vertical orange lines in the Throughput bars showing the upper limit. VLAN Configuration For Traffic VLAN configuration, see Chapter 18. QoS Configuration QoS configuration is described in Chapter 21. Nomadic You cannot change a fixed HSU to a nomadic HSU here without prior deregistration. For a nomadic HSU, you may change its operating level or even revert it to a fixed HSU: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐41...
Page 197 Nomadic RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐42...
Page 198 Operations Operations This functionality is identical to that for the HBS. Advanced: False Radar Mitigation This tab is only visible if • You are using a Regulation requiring Radar Channel Avoidance and • You are logged on as Installer For this release, this feature for HSUs, is relevant to the 5.3 GHz ETSI and the 5.4 GHz FCC/IC bands. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐43...
Page 199: Replacing An Hsu
Replacing an HSU Configuration of False Radar Mitigation is covered in Chapter 19. Replacing an HSU A defective HSU may be replaced by another HSU belonging to the sector provided that the replacement is not registered. Here is a typical scenario: Figure 8‐21: Unit 10.104.50.1 down; unit 10.104.50.3 available, not registered Since the replacement procedure is a rather delicate process, we will step through it with a detailed example based on the scenario in Figure 8‐21.  To replace a defective HSU: 1. Right click the defective unit for its context menu: It has a new item: Replace. 2. Click Replace. Your are offered a list of HSUs available as replacements. In our example there is one: 10.104.50.3 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐44...
Page 200 Replacing an HSU 3. Select the required unit by clicking on it. 4. Click OK. You are asked to confirm before proceeding: 5. Click OK again. You receive further confirmation: Here is the final outcome: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐45...
Page 201: Updating Hsu Services
Updating HSU Services Notice that 10.104.50.3 has replaced 10.104.50.1 inheriting most of its settings. The IP address of the replacement unit is not changed. To ensure that all 10.104.50.1 traffic actually gets to the new unit, you should also change its IP address to that of the original unit, 10.104.50.1. Note Updating HSU Services Choosing Update Services from an HSU context menu or clicking from the HSU button bar opens the Registration window. You may use this to switch the HSU between Spatial Multiplexing, Diversity and Auto mode. You may also change the HSU time slot allocation. Suspending an HSU You may break the link (cause a sync loss) to an un‐registered HSU for a fixed amount of time. Here is the scenario: HSU 10.104.50.1 is not registered. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐46...
Page 202: Changing The Sector Band
Changing the Sector Band  To suspend an un‐registered HSU: 1. Click Suspend in its context menu. You are requested to enter a suspend duration. 2. Choose a suspend time and click OK. During the suspend duration, the HSU will be deleted from the HBS Main Window HSU panel. The HSU returns to the main display with resumption of sync. Changing the Sector Band Changing the Band in use is always carried out at the sector level (not per installed ODU). To the Sector Band you must be logged on to the HBS as Installer. In Installer mode, the right hand button, on the Base Station button bar has an extra function, Change Band.  To change the Sector Band: 1. Click Change Band. A list of available Bands is displayed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐47...
Page 203 Changing the Sector Band Figure 8‐22: Change or Add Bands 2. Select the required Band and click OK. For our purposes, we choose 5.720‐5.960 GHz Universal. The band is highlighted and right button is enabled. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐48...
Page 204 Changing the Sector Band Figure 8‐23: Add/Change Band dialog 3. Click the right button. The following window opens: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐49...
Page 205 Changing the Sector Band 4. Here you may chose the working channel bandwidth and channel selection as in the activation process. Click OK to accept your choice. You are returned to the display in Figure 8‐23. 5. Click OK again. The following cautionary message is displayed: 6. Click Yes to continue. After a short delay, you are offered a final confirmation: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐50...
Page 206 Changing the Sector Band 7. Click OK. A sector re‐sync follows. Here is the final result: Having set the channel bandwidth and operating channels earlier, there is no need for deactivation and reactivation. You may also add new Bands by clicking the Add Bands button. There are several provisos to this: • Additional Bands must be available for your hardware • Such additional Bands must be available within the framework of your local regulations The foregoing applies to both regulated and unregulated Bands.  To obtain and install additional bands: 1. Make a list of ODU serial numbers for all HBSs and all HSUs to receive additional bands. The list should be a simple text file, one serial number per line. (The serial numbers are located on the stickers on the ODUs.) 2. As Installer, open the window of Figure 8‐22 above, and click Add Bands. The following instruction panel is displayed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐51...
Page 207 Changing the Sector Band Figure 8‐24: Add Bands Instructions Panel The serial numbers displayed relate to the ODUs in the sector. Click Copy to Clip‐ board. 3. This step applies only if you have additional un‐installed units: Before proceeding to step 2 in Figure 8‐24, open your own list in a plain text editor. If the displayed serial numbers are in the list, select your list and copy it all to the clip‐ board. Otherwise append the clipboard contents to your list. Select the whole list and save it to the clipboard. 4. Now carry out steps 2 to 5 in Figure 8‐24. Step 2 will take you to a Web page, which contains a form like this: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐52...
Page 208 Changing the Sector Band 5. Fill out the requested details. Remember to terminate the dialog by clicking the Get Key button. 6. The results of your request will be displayed with further instructions. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐53...
Page 209: Configuring Aes 256 Encryption Support
Configuring AES 256 Encryption Support A few minutes later, you should receive an email, containing in its body, a list of license keys. You may see error messages in the Status Column such as Band not supported or Serial not found. Supported bands typically reflect your local regulations. Check missing serial numbers with RADWIN Customer Service. Note 7. Copy and Paste the license keys into a plain text file and save it to a safe known place. 8. Open the Configure | Operations tab (Figure 8‐16). Check the License File button and navigate to the file you saved in the last step. 9. Click Activate. The next time you enter the Change Bands tab, the new bands will be available. Configuring AES 256 Encryption Support AES 256 support is per HSU but enabled from the HBS.  To enable AES 256 Encryption support for a sector: 1. Ensure that the HBS is hardware ready for AES 256: From the HBS Configuration but‐ ton, open the Inventory page and check that the hardware version is 9 or higher. Open a text file and copy/paste the serial number of the HBS to it. 2. Determine which HSUs require AES 256 support. From the Inventory page for each HSU, check that the hardware version is 9 or higher. Copy/paste the serial number of the HSU to the text list, one serial number per line. Alternatively, use the capture button in list mode at the HBS to copy paste a list of HSUs. In any event, you must still check the hardware level of each listed HSU. 3. Save the text file and send it to your equipment supplier with your license purchase order. 4. You will receive by return email a text attachment showing serial number and license key. Save the file to a known safe location. 5. At the HBS, open the Configuration | Operations tab (Figure 8‐16). Check the License File button and navigate to the file you saved in the last step. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐54...
Page 210 Configuring AES 256 Encryption Support 6. Click Activate. Yo can confirm activation by opening the Security tab. The AES 265 check box is available (Figure 8‐6). Check it to commence AES 256 Encryption. You can confirm AES 256 support per ODU by looking at the Encryption icon at the bottom right hand corner of the main window as shown in the following tables: Table 8‐2: AES Indicators for an HBS AES Level HBS Encryption Icon Supported Table 8‐3: AES Indicators for an HSU AES Level Licensed for AES 256 HSU Encryption Icon Supported In addition, the Security tab on any HSU Configuration widow (from the HBS or direct logon) will indicate when appropriate, that AES 256 is enabled: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐55...
Page 211: Configuration With Telnet
Configuration with Telnet AES 256 support for licensed HSUs is immediate and global ‐ either all licensed HSUs are AES 256 enabled or none. Note Configuration with Telnet Telnet Access to the HBS A Telnet terminal can be used to configure and monitor the RADWIN 5000 HPMP. To start a Telnet session on the HBS, use telnet <ODU_IP>. For example, if you run Telnet as follows, telnet 10.104.50.200 you will be asked for a user name and password. The Telnet log on user name is the password that you used to enter the RADWIN Manager (for example, the default: admin). The Telnet password is the corresponding Community string (default: netman). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐56...
Page 212 Telnet Access to the HBS Figure 8‐25: Telnet session log on to the HBS A Read‐Only Community string allows you to use display commands only whereas a Read‐ Write Community string allows you to use display commands and execute set commands. Supported HBS Telnet commands are shown in Table 8‐4 to Table 8‐6. Table 8‐4: HBS Telnet ‐ Display Commands Command Explanation Displays ODU product name, Name, Location, display inventory hardware and software revisions, uptime, MAC address. display management Displays IP, subnet, Gateway, Traps table display link <param:all,reg,unreg> Displays all static details about the sector or HSU display ethernet Displays Port table (State, Status and action) display ethernet_errors Displays Cable statistics display ntp Displays Time, Server and Offset Shows the performance monitor tables for each display PM <interface:AIR,LAN1> interface according to user defined monitoring <interval:current,day,month> intervals display bands Displays available bands RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐57...
Page 213 Set a specific trap from the traps table (e.g. set trap 3 <port:0‐65535> 192.168..101 162) set readpw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Set the read access password (Read Community) Set the read‐write access password (Read‐Write set writepw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Community) set trappw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Set the trap Community string set tpc<power:Value between Set the ODU Tx Power. If a wrong value is entered, minimal Tx power, and maximal Tx both min and max values shall be displayed in the power> error reply set name <new name> Set the name of the link set location <new location> Set the name of the location set contact <new contact> Set the name of the site manager set ethernet <port:LAN1> <mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,D Set the mode and speed of the Ethernet port ISABLE> Resets the ODU. The user is warned that the reboot command will reset the ODU. A new Telnet session to the ODU may be opened after the reset is complete. help Displays the available commands Table 8‐6: HBS Telnet ‐ Set Commands requiring Reset Command Explanation set secId <SectorID> Set new sector ID ‐ Reset required. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐58...
Page 214 Telnet Access to the HSU Telnet Access to the HSU The procedure is the same as for the HBS. Figure 8‐26: Telnet Management window ‐ HSU Supported HSU Telnet commands are shown in Table 8‐7 to Table 8‐9. Table 8‐7: HSU Telnet ‐ Display Commands Command Explanation Displays ODU product name, Name, Location, display inventory hardware and software revisions, uptime, MAC address. display management Displays IP, subnet, Gateway, Traps table display link Displays all static details about the HSU display ethernet Displays Port table (State, Status and action) display ethernet_errors Displays Cable statistics display ntp Displays Time, Server and Offset Shows the performance monitor tables for each display PM <interface:AIR,LAN1> interface according to user defined monitoring <interval:current,day,month> intervals display bands Displays available bands RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐59...
Page 215 Set the read access password (Read Community) Set the read‐write access password (Read‐Write set writepw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Community) set trappw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Set the trap Community string set buzzer Set the buzzer mode <mode:0=OFF,1=AUTO,2=ON> set tpc<power:Value between Set the ODU Tx Power. If a wrong value is entered, minimal Tx power, and maximal Tx both min and max values shall be displayed in the power> error reply set name <new name> Set the name of the link set location <new location> Set the name of the location set contact <new contact> Set the name of the site manager set ethernet <port:LAN1> <mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,D Set the mode and speed of the Ethernet port ISABLE> Resets the ODU. The user is warned that the reboot command will reset the ODU. A new Telnet session to the ODU may be opened after the reset is complete. help Displays the available commands Table 8‐9: HSU Telnet ‐ Set Commands requiring Reset Command Explanation set secId <SectorID> Set new sector ID ‐ Reset required. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 8‐60...
Page 216: Chapter 9: Direct Hsu Configuration
Chapter 9: Direct HSU Configuration Scope of this Chapter Direct management of an HSU may be carried out by a LAN connection to a managing computer (on‐site) or over‐the‐air (from the HBS site). There are several differences in the configuration functionality for a directly managed HSU compared to the method of Chapter 8 depending on whether the HSU is registered to a HBS, unregistered or not a member of any sector. Where configuration function is identical under direct connection and through the HBS, we will not repeat the details, which may be seen in Chapter 8. Configuring an HSU Log on to the HSU either directly or over‐the‐air as shown in Chapter 5. For a registered HSU, you will see a display like this: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 9‐1...
Page 217 Configuring an HSU Figure 9‐1: Direct or over the air connection to a registered HSU If you enabled RSS Extended View (see Enable RSS Extended View), then the center part of the display looks like this: Figure 9‐2: Registered HSU ‐ extended view For an unregistered HSU, the throughput (T‐put) fields and the Sector ID field would be empty. If the HBS is deactivated, or the HSU is stand‐alone you will see a display like this: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 9‐2...
Page 218 Configuration Menu Buttons Figure 9‐3: Direct connection to a stand‐alone HSU out of the box In what follows, we configure a registered HSU unless specifically specified otherwise. Configuration Menu Buttons The Backup and Restore buttons have the same functionality as the corresponding buttons for the HBS. They provide for backup and restore of the HSU software. A backup (full or configuration) may be restored to another HSU provided that the product IDs, revision levels and capacity of the source and target HSUs are identical. They are shown in the HSU Inventory window. Note The Buzzer button may set or mute the buzzer. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 9‐3...
Page 219 Air Interface Recall that the buzzer tone is primarily used for HSU antenna alignment. The Refresh button restores the current window to its previous state abandoning any changes you made, provided that you did not click Apply or OK. The configuration tabs here differ from the HSU configuration tabs under the HBS Table view in one respect: There is an Air Interface tab, which varies in functionality, depending on whether the HSU is registered or not. Air Interface Figure 9‐4: HSU Config. ‐ Air Interface for Registered fixed HSU RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 9‐4...
Page 220 Air Interface For a registered HSU this window is for information only. For an unregistered or unsynchronized fixed HSU, the Sector ID field will be blank or the last Sector ID used and editable and the Channel Bandwidth field will be set to default and active: Figure 9‐5: HSU Config. ‐ Air Interface for stand‐alone fixed HSU For a nomadic HSU or a HMU, the Air Interface display is different. First, the Sector ID is replaced by the Network ID. For a registered HSU, neither the Network ID or CBW can be touched: Figure 9‐6: HSU Config. ‐ Air Interface, registered nomadic HSU or HMU For an unregistered or unsynchronized HSU, you may edit both of these fields: Figure 9‐7: HSU Config. ‐ Air Interface, stand‐alone nomadic HSU or HMU Use this feature to switch a nomadic HSU or HMU to a different network. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 9‐5...
Page 221 Air Interface Where has my HSU gone? Suppose that you installed two collocated HBSs with contiguous sectors. It is possible that an HSU located close to the common sector boundary may “discover” the wrong HBS. A HSU can be “forced” across to another HBS by changing its Sector ID to that of the required HBS. To switch an HSU to another HBS, make sure that it is unregistered. You will need to log on to it directly and get to the Air Interface window: Figure 9‐8: HSU Config. ‐ Air Interface Unregistered HSU Enter the Sector ID of the required HBS and click OK. The HSU should then “discover” the required HBS. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 9‐6...
Page 222 Security Security You may only change the SNMP community strings over a direct or over‐the‐air connection. You can change the Link Password for an un‐synchronized HSU. Otherwise the functionality is the same as in page 8‐37. Advanced: False Radar Mitigation This tab is only visible if • You are using a Regulation requiring Radar Channel Avoidance and • You are logged on as Installer For this release, this feature for HSUs, is relevant to the 5.3 GHz ETSI and the 5.4 GHz FCC/IC bands. Configuration of False Radar Mitigation is covered in Chapter 19. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 9‐7...
Page 223: Chapter 10: Smart Bandwidth Management
Chapter 10: Smart Bandwidth Management What is Smart Bandwidth Management Smart Bandwidth Management (SBM) enables busy links to utilize unused time slot resources from relatively idle links. It applies to fixed and nomadic HSUs. It offers ‐ • Peak rates of over100% of assured static allocation for busy links • Enhanced overall sector utilization • Dynamic bandwidth allocation to maximize service provider throughput and adhere to customer SLAs To achieve best sector performance, each HSU is allocated separate uplink and downlink time slots. Downlink traffic is fully under HBS control, so that it can allocate any unused downlink time slots whether allocated or not to a busy link. The busy link may operate at an extremely high peak rates, 1000% utilization not being uncommon. Uplink traffic is unpredictable. Again, in the case of a busy link with other links relatively idle, the HBS will allocate extra uplink time slots to the busy link from free pool only. If all of the uplink time slots are allocated, then SBM will not operate in the uplink direction. The allocation of uplink and downlink time slots becomes a network policy issue. For example, if all the HSUs provide regular internet service, it might be advisable to give each one minimum time slots in both directions (subject to the 63 time slot maximum in each direction) and allow traffic to dynamically determine time slot utilization. Alternatively, if the HSUs are used for backhaul, the minimum number of time slots in either direction should be allocated to meet defined service requirements (such as a SLAs). The RADWIN Manager provides facilities to configure separate uplink and downlink time slots. It further monitors performance, providing tabular and graphic utilization statistics. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐1...
Page 224: Scope Of This Chapter
Scope of this Chapter Scope of this Chapter Use of Smart Bandwidth Management (SBM) as a tool to enhance resource utilization involves network management issues beyond the scope of a User Manual. What we will do here, is show how SBM is configured and demonstrate several basic scenarios. Our intent is to “get you started” with SBM by assisting you to develop your own intuition and networking skills setting up highly resource efficient sectors. The first point to keep in mind is that the SBM mechanism is always active in the HBS. It’s not something you can switch on or switch off. The issue here is how to get the best out of it. Terminology and Concepts: Recapitulation It is important both in following the discussion below, and viewing the RADWIN Manager Utilization windows to remember: » Downlink traffic is data transfer from an HBS to an HSU » Uplink traffic is data transfer from an HSU to an HBS » The HBS allocates time slots to sector HSUs in round‐robin fashion to effect time‐shar‐ ing. There are separate sets of 64 time slots for each of the uplink and downlink direc‐ tions. One time slot in each direction is reserved for SBM management leaving 63 in each direction to be allocated to sector HSUs. The uplink and downlink allocations are independent and therefore separately assignable. » For each fixed or nomadic HSU, Assured throughput is determined by the actual num‐ ber of time slots allocated to it in either direction. Peak throughput (higher than Assured throughput) may be achieved by allocating unused downlink time slots or unallocated uplink time slots to very busy HSUs. » Time slot allocation is the only mechanism available for utilization management. » Manual time slot allocation for a fixed HSU is carried out during registration or Ser‐ vice update: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐2...
Page 225 Terminology and Concepts: Recapitulation Figure 10‐1: Service (Time slots) update for a fixed HSU » Manual time slot allocation for nomadic HSUs is carried out from the HBS Configura‐ tion window: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐3...
Page 226: How Sbm Works
How SBM Works Figure 10‐2: Service (Time slots) update for a nomadic HSUs How SBM Works Downlink traffic is fully under HBS control, so that it can allocate any unused downlink time slots to a very busy link, whether allocated or in free pool. The busy link may operate at an extremely high throughput, 1000% utilization not being uncommon as will be seen in an example below. Uplink traffic is completely unpredictable. Again, in the case of a very busy link with other links relatively idle, the HBS will allocate extra uplink time slots to the busy link from free pool only. If all of the uplink time slots are allocated, then SBM will not operate in the uplink direction. The RADWIN Manager provides facilities to configure separate uplink and downlink time slots as shown in Figure 10‐1 and Figure 10‐2 above. It further monitors performance, providing tabular and graphic utilization statistics demonstrated below. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐4...
Page 227: Traffic Generation Tools
Each case demonstrated below is based on a single HBS with three fixed HSUs. Two of them will be idle and one will be heavily loaded (“the busy HSU”) to demonstrate the following cases: Table 10‐1: Traffic generation examples ‐ Time slot (TS) Allocation Downlink TS Uplink TS Example Purpose allocation allocation Required downlink BW taken from unused All HSUs 2 TS All HSUs 2 TS time slots Busy HSU 2 TS, Required downlink BW taken from others take all All HSUs 2 TS allocated but unused time slots remaining TS Busy HSU 1 TS, All HSUs 2 TS others take all Busy HSU “starved” in uplink direction remaining TS Busy HSU 1 TS, Busy HSU takes unallocated uplink time All HSUs 2 TS others take half slots remaining TS We will look at Example 1 in great detail, to ensure that you understand each item appearing in the SBM Utilization window. Subsequent examples will be explained more briefly, concentrating on utilization issues rather than graphic features. Traffic generation was accomplished by using two parallel Jperf sessions. One sent traffic at 100 Mbps from the HBS to the HSU. The second sent traffic at 50 Mbps from the HSU to the HBS. Both units were driven at maximum capacity. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐5...
Page 228 Example 1 Example 1 Downlink Uplink Purpose allocation allocation All HSUs 2 TS All HSUs 2 TS Required downlink BW taken from unallocated time slots In Figure 10‐3 below, observe that the sector is grossly under‐allocated. This situation might be appropriate if all the client HSU were supplying Internet service only. Figure 10‐3: Sector status for Example 1 The Rx and Tx Rates for the HBS in themselves do not mean very much. But the changes to them will be noticeable in the next three examples, offering a comparative basis for various time slot allocations. Sector Utilization Sector utilization is displayed by using the right most tab on the main window as seen in the next screen capture: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐6...
Page 229 Example 1 Figure 10‐4: Sector Utilization Pane from the main window for Example 1 The current numerical values for each measured field for the selected HSU may be seen by moving the horizontal slider just below the bottom segment. The graphs provide a time‐line. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐7...
Page 230 Unit Explanation Traffic UL Mbps Traffic load sent to the HBS Traffic DL Mbps Traffic load received from the HBS Percentage of sector UL time slots utilized for Sector Relative UL Percentage transmission to the HBS. May be over HSU’s allocation if there are unallocated UL time slots available. Percentage of sector DL time slots utilized for reception Sector Relative DL Percentage from the HBS. May be over HSU’s allocation if there are available UL time slots available, allocated or not Percentage of HSU UL time slots utilized for transmission HSU Based Percentage to the HBS. May be over 100% if there are unallocated Relative UL UL time slots available. Percentage of HSU DL time slots utilized for reception HSU Based Percentage from the HBS. May be over 100% if there are available Relative DL UL time slots available, allocated or not To get a better idea of what is happening, we will enlarge each section of Figure 10‐4 in turn. The top left hand graph shows sector utilization: Figure 10‐5: Sector Utilization ‐ Example 1 Figure 10‐5 shows the overall sector utilization as seen by the HBS. At any point, you can mouse‐over any of the graphs to see the current value in a larger more convenient format. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐8...
Page 231 Example 1 This is useful if you are using a laptop or other device with a small screen. The values in Figure 10‐5 are as expected: The HBS is using a little over half its capacity in the uplink direction. The excess is overhead required to monitor the sector. In the downlink direction, the excess over 50% is incidental as will be seen from the top right graph showing sector utilization as a time line: Figure 10‐6: Sector Utilization ‐ time line ‐ Example 1 The “glitches” are due to Jperf and host computer limitations. The lower pair of graphs show utilization of a selected HSU either sector relative or self‐ relative. Use the selector in the HSU utilization title bar to make a choice. We first look at the HSU based utilization. (In our view, the Sector relative measurements will make more sense if we first understand what is happening at the HSU level.) Figure 10‐7 shows the HSU relative utilization for the selected HSU. The green percentage bars are easy to understand. They are both well over 100% since the whole sector is grossly under‐allocated. Both values are over 1000%! More specifically, if the HSU could only use its two allocated time slots in both directions, it is fairly easy to demonstrate that it would not be able to operate at maximum capacity. Since it is able to “borrow” the unused uplink and downlink time slots, it reaches maximum throughput and operates at over ten times the assured rate define by two time slots in both directions. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐9...
Page 232 Example 1 The blue uplink and downlink bars reflect the amount of traffic being handled by this HSU. The HSU itself is a 50Mbps (aggregate) unit, so it is operating at a maximum capacity of about 25 Mbps in both directions. The black figures above each bar show the actual throughput in Mbps and are updated about once per second. Figure 10‐7: HSU Utilization ‐ HSU Relative ‐ Example 1 Here is the time‐line for the same HSU: Figure 10‐8: HSU Utilization ‐ HSU Relative time line ‐ Example 1 Next, we examine the behavior of this HSU relative to the sector. Figure 10‐9: HSU Utilization ‐ Sector Relative ‐ Example 1 The HSU utilization across the sector is not very different from Figure 10‐5, since have one busy HSU and the rest idle. The busy HSU receives all the resources it needs, as reflected by the blue throughput bars which are almost the same as those in Figure 10‐6. Figure 10‐10 shows the sector relative time line, which is quite steady as to be expected. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐10...
Page 233 Example 2 Figure 10‐10: HSU Utilization ‐ Sector Relative time line ‐ Example 1 Example 2 Downlink Uplink Purpose allocation allocation Busy HSU 2 TS, Required downlink BW taken from allocated but unused others take all All HSUs 2 TS time slots remaining TS In Figure 10‐11 below, observe that the sector is fully allocated in the downlink direction. Figure 10‐11: Sector status for Example 2 ‐ All DL time slots allocated RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐11...
Page 234 Example 3 Since all unused downlink slots are available to the busy HSU, the utilization graphs for this case are very similar to those of Example 1 and we will not repeat them all. The main difference is in the sector utilization: Figure 10‐12: Sector Utilization ‐ Example 2 The downlink utilization is higher than for Example 1, reflecting the fact that the HBS must spend proportionally more time checking the inactive HSUs. Similarly, the Sector relative HSU downlink utilization is higher by the same amount. Example 3 Downlink Uplink Purpose allocation allocation Busy HSU 1 TS, others take all All HSUs 2 TS Busy HSU “starved” in uplink direction remaining TS In this case, we are deliberately “starving” the busy HSU, by allocating it one uplink time slot and dividing the rest between the inactive HSUs. The situation is shown in Figure 10‐13. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐12...
Page 235 Example 3 Figure 10‐13: Sector status for Example 3 ‐ All UL time slots allocated The effect on sector utilization is quite dramatic as seen in Figure 10‐14 below. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐13...
Page 236 Example 3 Figure 10‐14: Sector Utilization Pane from the main window for Example 3 Uplink utilization is 100% despite almost no traffic getting through from the busy HSU to the HBS as seen in Figure 10‐15 and the enlarged left hand bar chart in Figure 10‐16 below: Figure 10‐15: HSU Utilization ‐ Sector Relative time line ‐ Example 3 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐14...
Page 237 Example 4 Figure 10‐16: HSU Utilization ‐ Sector Relative ‐ Example 3 In all of this, downlink utilization is unaffected and remains as for the first example. The importance of leaving a “pool “of unallocated uplink time slots (if possible) is illustrated in Example 4, which prevents HSU “starvation”. Example 4 Downlink Uplink Purpose allocation allocation Busy HSU 1 TS, others take All HSUs 2 TS Busy HSU takes unallocated uplink time slots half remaining TS This example, as seen in Figure 10‐17 leaves a pool of unallocated UL time slots to avoid busy HSU starvation. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐15...
Page 238: Figure 10-18 Sector Utilization
Example 4 Figure 10‐17: Sector status for Example 4 ‐ Half UL time slots allocated Figure 10‐18: Sector Utilization Pane from the main window for Example 4 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐16...
Page 239: Figure 10-20 Sector Utilization
Example 4 Figure 10‐19: HSU Utilization ‐ Sector Relative time line ‐ Example 4 The left hand bar graphs for each section are instructive. Here first, is Sector Utilization: Figure 10‐20: Sector Utilization ‐ Example 4 The downlink results reflect both the actual traffic and HBS monitoring of all the HSUs. The uplink figures reflect the same thing. Despite there being more than adequate free uplink time slots, the HBS overhead of taking care of inactive HSUs is noticeable. Here is HSU self‐relative utilization: Figure 10‐21: HSU Utilization ‐ HSU Relative ‐ Example 4 The percentage utilization here is very high ‐ significantly more so than Example 1. The actual traffic throughputs to the busy HSU are slightly lower ‐ for the same overhead reasons. Similar considerations are reflected in the HSUs sector relative utilization: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐17...
Page 240 Example Summary Figure 10‐22: HSU Utilization ‐ Sector Relative ‐ Example 4 Example Summary For readability reasons, we will use the left hand bar graphs rather than the time lines to summarize the scenarios. In each case, we have chosen the bar graphs to be as representative as possible. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐18...
Page 241 Example Summary Table 10‐3: Unitization Summary for our four examples All HSUs 2 TS All HSUs 2 TS Busy HSU 1 TS, others all remaining TS Busy HSU 1 TS, others half remaining TS All HSUs 2 TS Busy HSU 2 TS, others, remaining TS All HSUs 2 TS All HSUs 2 TS RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐19...
Page 242: About Hbs Overhead
About HBS Overhead About HBS Overhead There is always some overhead on the HBS. Recall that one time slot in each of the uplink and downlink directions is reserved by the HBS for sector management. In our four examples we noted that the occurrence of HBS overhead increases when allocating time slots even to “idle” HSUs. As we saw, the percentage point sector load increases as you allocate further downlink time slots, or maintain any unused but allocated uplink time slots. It is straightforward to demonstrate that overhead is also channel‐bandwidth dependent. If you repeat the four examples under 10 and 5 MHz channel bandwidth, the load overhead percentage increases as channel bandwidth decreases. Conversely, if you are able to operate at 40MHz, the overhead percentage drops. To illustrate the effect of different channel bandwidths, we show in order, Example 3 at 10, 20 and 40 MHz: Figure 10‐23: Example 3: Half the uplink time slots reserved at 10 MHz CBW Notice that at 10MHz channel bandwidth, the sector utilization is 100% in both directions! RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐20...
Page 243: Figure 10-24 Example 3: Half
About HBS Overhead Figure 10‐24: Example 3: Half the uplink time slots reserved at 20 MHz CBW At 20 MHz channel bandwidth, the sector utilization is around 80% in the uplink direction and abbot 63% in the uplink direction. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐21...
Page 244: Tcp/Ip And Other Sla Considerations
TCP/IP and other SLA Considerations Figure 10‐25: Example 3: Half the uplink time slots reserved at 40 MHz CBW At 40 MHz channel bandwidth, the sector utilization is around 70% in the uplink direction and abbot 26% in the uplink direction. The percentage sector utilization has dropped dramatically for the same traffic load. TCP/IP and other SLA Considerations The foregoing example were all based on UDP traffic. If the sector traffic has a heavy TCP/IP content (including dependent protocols such as HTTP/HTTPS) you must allow sufficient time slots particularly in the uplink direction to ensure the that TCP/IP ACK messages are transmitted without delay. Some theoretical calculations are possible, but ultimately you will need to use a hardware traffic generator to assist your time slot allocation. This is particularly critical if you are operating a sector with SLA. The same holds true if you are offering a backhaul service with SLA regardless of the traffic packet composition. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 10‐22...
Page 245: Chapter 11: Bringing Up A Mobility Sector
Chapter 11: Bringing Up a Mobility Sector Scope of this Chapter Mobility solutions offers powerful, easy to deploy base stations that guarantee high capacity connectivity to ruggedized mobile units mounted on vehicles, trains and ships. RADWIN 5000 Mobility enables: • Perimeter security ‐ two way video transmission between patrol vehicles • On‐board video surveillance and Internet access for public transportation • Oil rig to ship ‐ video and data connectivity • Unmanned vehicle operation – remote control of heavy machinery for mines and ports RADWIN 5000 is designed to ensure that HMUs attain continuous service within a sector and seamless service when crossing into a new sector. Mobility applications are typically large scale projects. A railway application for example, requires a chain of overlapped sectors along hundreds or thousands of kilometers of railway track. The detailed use of RADWIN 5000 elements in a Mobility application is beyond the scope of this manual. The purpose of this chapter is to demonstrate the use of RADWIN Manager in bringing up and managing a physically installed Mobility sector. In practice, one sector would be built by hand (as we will do below). The complete sector configuration can be saved and uploaded to further sectors. For Mobility project management questions, please consult RADWIN Customer Service. Concepts Each HMU is allocated to one of four HBS levels labelled A, B, C and D. The operating parameters for each level (such as VLAN, MIR, QoS, time slots, fixed rate, Spatial Multiplexing/Diversity antenna mode) can be different for each level allowing for broad prioritization of service between different types of mobile units. This requires that each HMU be assigned a level to join a sector. The actual joining process is quite dynamic since the HSU will typically move from sector to sector at high speed. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐1...
Page 246: What You Need
What You Need Changing any of VLAN, MIR, QoS, fixed rate, Spatial Multiplexing/Diversity antenna mode for one configured HSU at a given level, changes all other HSUs at that level. If you add a new HSU to a sector (by direct connection) at a given level, at sync time, it will acquire the existing parameters for that level. A HMU must be able to send and receive service traffic while moving. To avoid service “glitches” while switching between successive HBSs, the HBS hand‐over time must be very small. For RADWIN 5000 HBSs it is typically less than 500 ms, depending on selection of Mobility channels. A HMU detects that it is time to seek the next HBS when its rate drops below a predefined minimum capacity threshold based on a minimum supported rate. The HBS chosen will be the first found offering an RSS level above a minimum threshold (by default ‐60 dBm), which you can configure for each HMU. If no HBS can be found satisfying the latter criterion, then the HSU will sync with the HBS that has the highest RSS level (even though it is below the RSS Threshold). It is up to the Mobility Project RF planners to ensure that HBSs are spaced with coverage overlap so that on the one hand the HSU RSS level does not fall so low that it loses synchronization between HBSs and on the other hand, successive HBSs do not interfere with one another. In a Mobility project, it is fairly typical to use a fixed channel at each HBS and to have the HSUs configured to use the group of channels used by the HBSs so as to minimize hand‐over time. What You Need The RADWIN 5000 Mobility products are different from the fixed/nomadic products. They have different part numbers. Ensure that your HBS and HSUs as delivered are the Mobility models. Each sector comes with a pre‐installed operating band. You can change it in the usual way. If you do ensure than each of the HSUs is changed. Alternatively (better), bring up the sector as‐ is and change the band sector‐wide. Getting Started We will create a sector with three HMUs. There is no difference in the log‐on procedure to the HBS. To avoid needless repetition and issues not really relevant to this chapter, we will start out with the HBS and the HMUs set to there factory defaults except for the IP addresses. We will maintain the IP addresses used in the previous chapters. In practice, the IP addresses of sector element may well be configured using Direct or Local Connection prior to reproduction of sector parameters from a “template” sector (such as we are creating) and most likely before deployment in the field. Further we will not make any use of the Map view in this chapter. Once again, in practice, a Mobile system would be managed from a NOC using an enterprise standard NMS. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 247: Preparing The Hbs
Preparing the HBS The Table view after logging on to the HBS looks like this: Figure 11‐1: Mobile HBS after initial log‐on You activate the HBS in the usual way. Be aware that use of fixed versus automatic channel selection is part of your RF planning. We will maintain the naming scheme used in earlier chapters, but our HSUs will have names like HMU.01.01 and so on (instead of HFU and HNU for fixes and nomadic types). The activation wizard pages are identical to those used for a fixed sector. The first difference between a new activated mobile and fixed sector is that the HSUs do not appear in the Table view. Preparing the HBS Open the Configuration window and then the Mobility tab: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐3...
Page 248 Preparing the HBS Figure 11‐2: HBS Mobility Configuration The maximum distance is a nominal common distance assumed by the HBS for all HMUs in its sector. It is taken as the maximum distance any HSU can be from a HBS. (It effectively guarantees an identical propagation delay for all HSUs in the sector to compensate for rapid HSU movement.) If the distance is set too small, there is a risk of sync loss for distant HSUs; if it is set too large it will reduce performance across the sector. The choice is part of RF planning for Mobility projects and is beyond the scope of this manual. We will pre‐register three HSU slots to levels A, B and C and time slots to each level as shown: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐4...
Page 249 Preparing the HBS The time slots as shown mean 8 downlink and 2 uplink per unit X 3 units at level A and so on up to 63 available time slots in both directions. Click Register, leave the maximum distance as is and click OK to leave the configuration window. Here is the result: We have “place holders” for the maximum allowable HMUs in the sector. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐5...
Page 250: Registering Hmus
Registering HMUs Registering HMUs Registration of actual HMUs is accomplished by direct connection. You assign each one to one of the four levels. At the same time, you may configure other parameters such as Air Interface, IP address (though not strictly necessary). The process is slightly different for VMUs.  To assign a HMU to a level by direct connection: 1. Log on to a HMU in the usual way. Here is the opening window: For the VMU, the window is different: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐6...
Page 251 Registering HMUs Notice the GPS status panel on the left and the WiFi active icon in the bottom status bar. 2. Open the Configuration window. Update the system parameters. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐7...
Page 252 Registering HMUs 3. Open the Air Interface tab. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐8...
Page 253 Registering HMUs 4. Enter the Network ID (EBGX in our example) and if necessary, change the Channel Bandwidth. 5. Open the Tx & Antenna tab and ensure that the antenna type is correct. You may change any other antenna parameters as well. We set Tx Power for our example to 5 dBm. 6. Open the Management tab and set the HSU IP address. 7. For the VMUs, open the Ethernet tab. The window is different from a regular HMU: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐9...
Page 254 Registering HMUs Notice the equipment PoE port is displayed. Further, you can enable/disable WiFi support here. The effect of checking or unchecking the check box is respectively, to power up or power down the WiFi access point (not just to start /stop radio transmit / receive). 8. Open the Mobility tab. Click the required level. We leave this HMU on A. We will place our other two HMUs in level B. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐10...
Page 255 Registering HMUs 9. Set the RSS threshold parameter. 10. Chose the required Available Channels from the list. 11. Again, the for the VMU, the window is slightly different: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐11...
Page 256 Registering HMUs The VMUbattery mode shutdown timer should be set here. 12. Click OK to accept your changes and close the window. 13. Repeat above steps for each HMU. For our example, we assign one HSU each to levels A, B and C. Here then, is the final result: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐12...
Page 257: Update Service
Update Service Figure 11‐3: Configured Mobility sector From this point, you may use the configuration and reporting facilities in the usual way. Update Service In a Mobility sector, service as defined by time‐slot allocation and throughput setting, is carried out at each of the four levels, A‐D. To show how it is done, we will update the service at level A in the sector of Figure 11‐3.  To update the service at level A: 1. Right‐click any one of the HMU cards in Figure 11‐3. The following window is dis‐ played: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐13...
Page 258 Update Service Either Diversity or Auto Selection are recommended. 2. You may change the rate from adaptive to fixed rate (the units are Mbps): Your choice will be largely application dependent. For example, for video applica‐ tions you would use a fixed rate. For Internet access, adaptive is appropriate. For our example, we leave it at adaptive. 3. For illustrative purposes, change the uplink time slots per HMU from 2 to 4. You are asked to confirm the change: 4. Click OK to accept. The change is immediately reflected in the Sector status panel: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐14...
Page 259: Saving The Hbs Settings For Reuse As A Template
Saving the HBS Settings for Reuse as a Template The allocated percentage of uplink time slots has increased from 29% to 38%. Saving the HBS Settings for Reuse as a Template Refer to Figure 11‐2 of which the following is an excerpt: Following any further fine tuning, open up the HBS Mobility tab, and click Save. You are offered the standard Save File dialog. Save the HBS Mobility settings file (MobilitySettings.mob) to a convenient location. Creating a Sector from an HBS Template The saved settings file may be used as a template for further sectors.  To create a sector from a HBS Mobility settings file: 1. Starting with a new HBS and HSUs, log on to the HBS. 2. Activate the HBS in the usual way. 3. Open the Mobility tab in the Configuration window. In the Save / Upload Settings window, click Upload. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐15...
Page 260: Figure 11-4 Preparing To
Creating a Sector from an HBS Template Figure 11‐4: Preparing to upload the Mobility file 4. In our case we have one HBS, so it is sufficient to enter the Mobility file as shown and then click Start. After a few moments, the Status field indicates Done. The result is as expected: You will of course need to separately configure the participating HSUs. If we connect our three configured HMUs, we revert to our original sector. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐16...
Page 261: Creating A Sector From An Hbs Template And An Hbs List
Creating a Sector from an HBS Template and an HBS List Creating a Sector from an HBS Template and an HBS List  To create a sector from a HBS IP list and a Mobility settings file: 1. In the window of Figure 11‐4, enter a HBS list file. The format of the file is lines of <IP address> <Read‐Write community> For example, 10.104.50.200 netman All of the HBSs need to activated and accessible (via a switch) to the managing com‐ puter. They need not be on the same sub‐net. Alternatively, enter them one by one using the Plus button. Any unactivated HBSs will be shown as unavailable: 2. Make any further changes to the displayed list using the Plus/Minus buttons. 3. Click Start to commence the process. 4. The list window will indicate the success or otherwise of the upload for each HBS. WiFi Connectivity for a Vehicular Mobile Unit Getting Started Completing the regular VMUregistration is a prerequisite to WiFi connectivity. The base station backhauls the WiFi traffic. As supplied, the VMU is configured as single access point with SSID Install, and accessible over‐the‐air from a laptop equipped with WiFi hardware, running under Windows 7 or later. Under Windows 7, your WiFi system icon and WiFi display should look something like this: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐17...
Page 262 Accessing the VMU with a Web Browser For installation purposes only, the VMU is a DHCP/DNS server and you do not need any IP address. You have enough connectivity to pre‐configure the VMU for service; later you will be able to access it through its LAN cable or through a switch to which it is connected, to effect further configuration changes. While you are connected to the VMU for pre‐configuration, you will probably not have internet access, since the unit uses its own built‐in gateway and DNS resolver. Accessing the VMU with a Web Browser In what follows, we will use Mozilla Firefox, release 16 for demonstration purposes. Launch your web browser; if you have a non‐blank home page, you will see something like this: Whatever the case, clear the URL field and type in one more random characters: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐18...
Page 263 About the Open Source link Hit the Enter key. You are offered a log‐on window. The initial user name and password are respectively, admin and wireless. Here is part of the opening display: About the Open Source link The VMU Web software makes use of several Open Source packages. The relevant license statements are contained in a “tar ball”, which may be downloaded, unpacked and viewed from the Open Source link. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐19...
Page 264 About Pre‐Configuration. About Pre‐Configuration. During the use of the GUI, your browser may display this message, followed by apparent inactivity: Note Use the browser Refresh function to resume activity. In this section, we will visit all of the browser functions, but we will configure the minimum to get WiFi operational. Starting Pre‐Configuration Click the Interfaces button to open the Interfaces display: The WAN display shows the AP unit MAC address, which you should store. Ethernet mode is disconnected ‐ that is, the unit is not available for service. Later, we will enable it. The IP address is the default IP address for the unit itself, for maintenance purposes. Later, we will RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐20...
Page 265: Continuing Pre-Configuration
Continuing Pre‐Configuration change it to make the unit a DHCP client through a switch. The Received and Transmitted figures are cumulative. The VMU operates as one or more virtual AP (VAP) units up to a maximum of eight. For pre‐ configuration purposes, the first available VAP, shown as WLAN 1, is set up by default with name and SSID Install. Do not change the WLAN 1 SSID from Install to anything else until you are certain that you are done with pre‐configuration. Changing the Install SSID moves the unit into “service mode” disabling the DHCP/DNS server, enabling Ethernet service and becoming addressable only over wire through Caution an IP address. Notice further from the WLAN 1 table that each VAP has its own MAC address. From a service perspective, the VAPs look like separate physical AP units. We will configure three VAPs and check each one for connectivity with a remote laptop. Continuing Pre-Configuration Preparing the Radio Parameters The System page items may be configured later. Open the Network page: The Connection Type is Static IP address or DHCP. DHCP is the default. The default IP address and subnet mask are provided for use with a static IP address or if the DHCP server becomes unavailable. For demonstration purposes, we will leave them as is. Now, open the Wireless page. The most important part of pre‐configuration is carried out here. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐21...
Page 266 Preparing the Radio Parameters The Country Code is an absolute must. You cannot proceed without it. Note RADWIN 5000 HPMP VMU complies with the IEEE 802.11 WiFi standards which vary from country to country. There are country dependent regulations governing channel allocation and Tx power considerations for the 2.4 GHz WiFi band. Choose your location: Click Save to save your changes. You will not be able to proceed without saving your changes. If you touch anything else you will get the following prompt: This prompt will reappear from time to time at “milestones” requiring a commit before you can proceed. With Save done, you may now set radio‐wide parameters: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐22...
Page 267 Security The radio is on by default. You may use this button to enable or disable it for maintenance. Do not change it now. If you do, you will lock yourself out of the unit. Warning The Mode b/g/n is the only one available. We will also accept the usual WiFi default channel 6. Change it later to channel 1 or 11 if you experience interference. Tx power may be chosen from 3 dBm to 16 dBm for our location. Your location may offer a different maximum Tx power. For our purposes, it may stay at 3 dBm. Security While you are doing pre‐configuration, any WiFi client in range can detect the unit with SSID Install. Here is your current situation: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐23...
Page 268 Security Check Show Connected Clients. After a few moments we see this: The first MAC 90:... is the demonstration workstation. The second item commencing 00:... is unknown and presumed a “snooper”. Change Network Authentication from Disabled as shown, to WPA2 (PSK): Change the password and store it in a safe place. The password length must be between eight and 32 characters. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐24...
Page 269 Preparing Additional VAPs Click Save to preserve your changes. Again, check Show Connected Clients. This time the list is empty. Anyone logged on before must log on again with the password. You may also set SSID Broadcast to Off when working in Install mode. Note Preparing Additional VAPs Open the Virtual AP 2 page: Click Create: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐25...
Page 270 Preparing Additional VAPs First, notice that the default SSID is default1 and the corresponding button is also so labeled. In line with our program of getting service started with minimum configuration, we just change the SSID to something more meaningful. Next repeat the procedure for Virtual AP 3. Finally (this must be the last step, as we are going to be disconnected), change the Install SSID as well. Here is the situation prior to our last Save: On clicking Save, you are offered a confirmatory message: Click Yes to accept your changes. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐26...
Page 271: Checking The Gps
Confirming the Pre‐Configuration Your browser may become inactive, since there is no longer an over‐the‐air connection. Confirming the Pre‐Configuration To confirm our work so far, we must connect the VMU unit to a DHCP server, and then access each of the VAPs from a remote laptop. Checking the GPS The front panel of the VMU has a GPS status LED. The GPS unit is functioning correctly when the LED is steady green. Other conditions are as follows: Table 11‐1: GPS Status LEDs LED Status GPS Status Disconnected Amber Connected, no satellites available (usually when indoors) Green, blinking Connected, searching Green Connected, satellite found The GPS data are displayed on the VMU main window status area: The GPS data may also be viewed in the VMU Web Interface, which in addition, offers a Google Earth map centered on the current location. See WEB Interface for VMUs. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 11‐27...
Page 272: Chapter 12: Monitoring And Diagnostics
Chapter 12: Monitoring and Diagnostics The RADWIN Manager application enables you to monitor the sector, as well as perform basic diagnostic operations such as throughput testing. This chapter covers: • Retrieving link information • Throughput checking • Recent events • Performance monitoring • Active Alarms • Link Budget Calculator • Online Help • Obtaining support Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) The Get Diagnostics feature collects and writes link and Manager information from selected sites into a text file. The file information can be used for diagnostics and should be sent to RADWIN Customer Service to expedite assistance. The following table lists link and system information that can be monitored. Table 12‐1: Get Diagnostics Data and Description Data Description System Data General information about the system • List of system events including those from other sites if this site is defined as the trap destination Events Log • Last 256 events from all sites Sector Information Information about the HBS and HSU settings Site Configuration Data about the site parameters...
Page 273: Figure 12-1 Get Diagnostics
Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) Table 12‐1: Get Diagnostics Data and Description (Continued) Data Description Monitor Detailed event data record Restriction Table This is the Connection Table from Figure 8‐17 Active Alarms Active Alarms are raised for any event affecting availability or quality Performance Network performance data over defined time periods ‐ ‐ every 15 Spectrum Analysis For HBS, selected HSUs and general inter fence statistics for the sector  To get diagnostics: 1. Click the Get Diagnostics button: Figure 12‐1: Get Diagnostics Dialog Box ‐ HBS RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐2...
Page 274: Figure 12-2 Get Diagnostics
Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) Figure 12‐2: Get Diagnostics Dialog Box ‐ HSU 2. Select or deselect the data options. If the file is to be sent to RADWIN Customer Service leave all options checked. 3. HBS only: Choose HSUs to be included. 4. Click File Path to specify the file name and older in which you want to save the file and then click Run to save the information. On completion, the status of the checked items is confirmed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐3...
Page 275: Link Compatibility
Link Compatibility The content of the Diagnostics report is an aggregate of all the more specific reports discussed below. It is primarily intended for use by RADWIN Customer Service. The Spectrum Analysis output is available directly from the Spectrum View utility as a CSV file (see Chapter 24). The format in the Diagnostics report is intended for use by RADWIN Customer Service. The Spectrum Analysis section of the Diagnostics report is based on the last available spectrum analysis (if any). If you are submitting a support request involving interference issues, or if you are specifically asked by Customer Note Service to submit a Diagnostics report containing a recent spectrum analysis, you should carry out the analysis in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 24 prior to using the Get Diagnostics facility. Link Compatibility Compatibility between the HBS and an HSU is primarily determined by the software level of each element. Advisory messages are typically displayed as follows: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐4...
Page 276: Figure 12-3 Typical Incompatibly
Software Upgrade available Figure 12‐3: Typical incompatibly messages for HSUs on HBS display On the HBS window, these messages can only be seen in HSU list mode, and in the HBS Active Alarms log. Figure 12‐4: This HSU requires a software upgrade On the HSU window, these messages appear as shown in Figure 12‐4. The messages are as follows: Software Upgrade available This is an advisory message. If the upgrade is not carried out, then corrections in the upgrade will not be available. This message may appear for an active HBS or any HSU in the sector, registered or not. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐5...
Page 277: Throughput Checking
Software Upgrade recommended Software Upgrade recommended This is also an advisory message. It typically occurs with a new HBS or new HSUs added to a sector. If the upgrade is not carried out, then the HBS or HSU (s) will ope rate with limited or degraded functionality. This message may appear for an active HBS or any HSU in the sector, registered or not. Software Upgrade required This message will be displayed if a product band ID mismatch is detected. Thus for a HBS, it cannot occur unless one or more HSUs are registered. Affected HSUs will always show it as depicted above in Figure 12‐4 above. For such HSUs, traffic is disabled and the only services available are Change Band and Software Upgrade. Throughput Checking In this mode, RADWIN 5000 HPMP estimates Ethernet throughput by filling frames over the air to maximum for 30 seconds. This mode should not influence service. The test may be carried out for the HBS or an HSU.  To use Throughput Checking: 1. HBS: Chose Estimated Throughput as shown: HSU from HBS: Chose Estimated Throughput as shown: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐6...
Page 278 Throughput Checking HSU direct or over the air: Unavailable. 2. In either case, you are asked to enter the testing period: 3. Enter the required time and click OK to continue. The Ethernet services area changes appearance and the estimated throughput is displayed: At the end of 30 seconds, the display reverts to normal. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐7...
Page 279: Recent Events
Recent Events Recent Events The Recent Events log records system failures, loss of synchronization, loss of signal, compatibility problems and other fault conditions and events. The foregoing event types include events from all links for which this managing computer has been defined as the traps address. Only events from RADWIN equipment will be shown. Note Alarms (traps) are displayed in the Events Log in the lower panel of the main window. The Events Log may be saved as a text file. The Events Log includes the following fields: » Sequential number (ID) » Date and time stamp » Message » Trap source » IP address of the ODU that initiated alarm. You may filter the events shown by choosing All or Internal. A full report may be seem by clicking Recent Events: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐8...
Page 280: Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring Figure 12‐5: Recent Events: Left to right: HBS, HSU from HBS, HSU direct In each case the report has the same format: Here is a more readable enlargement of the table area: The left button may be used to save the report to a file. Performance Monitoring RADWIN 5000 HPMP Performance Monitoring constantly monitors traffic over the radio link and collects statistics data for the air interface and Ethernet ports. It does so continuously, even when the RADWIN Manager is not connected. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐9...
Page 281: Figure 12-6 Performancem
Figure 12‐6: Performance Monitoring: L. to R. ‐ HBS, HSU from HBS, HSU The on‐screen and generated reports have the same general formats, but there are differences in what is reported. The HBS Performance Monitoring window offers the following button menu: Choose the data period required with the 15 Minutes button. • Current gives you the latest entry. • 15 Minutes provides data in a scroll down list in 15 minute intervals • Daily (24 hours) shows results for the last 30 days at midnight. The Threshold button enables you to set the upper traffic threshold for reporting. Traffic conditions above the threshold indicate congestion and probably lost frames. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐10...
Page 282: Figure 12-7 Setting The Upper
Figure 12‐7: Setting the upper traffic threshold To get data for display, click Get Data. The process may take a few seconds. Here is an extract Performance Monitoring report based on 15 minutes recording: Figure 12‐8: HBS ‐ Performance Monitoring report ‐ Valid data The meaning of the column headings is shown in the following table: Table 12‐2: HBS Performance Monitoring Fields Abbreviation Column Heading Description Meaning Green tick for current and valid; Red cross for invalidated data (See example below). Note that the Integrity Valid data flag Performance Monitoring data is not valid if not all the values were stored (e.g., due to clock changes within the interval or power up reset) Data are recorded every 15 minutes; the last 30 days Date & Time Time stamp of recordings are maintained. Roll‐over is at midnight. Unavailable Seconds in which the interface was out of service. Seconds The number of seconds in which there was at least Errored seconds one error block. Severe Errored The number of seconds in which the service quality Seconds was low as determined by the BBER threshold. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐11...
Page 283 Table 12‐2: HBS Performance Monitoring Fields (Continued) Abbreviation Column Heading Description Meaning Background The number of errored blocks in an interval. Block Error Received The number of Megabytes received at the specified Rx MBytes Mbytes port within the interval Transmitted The number of Megabytes transmitted at the Tx MBytes Mbytes specified port within the interval. Above Traffic Threshold set in Seconds count when actual traffic exceeded the Thresh Figure 12‐7 threshold The number of seconds that the configured Ethernet Active Seconds service is active Data becomes invalidated following a reset. In the example below, the HBS was reset shortly after 11:00. All data prior to that time becomes invalidated. The only valid item is the first recording after re‐sync. Figure 12‐9: HBS ‐ Performance Monitoring report ‐ Showing invalid data Use the Save button to store the current data to file and the Clear button to delete currently stored performance data. The Performance Monitoring window for the HSU is slightly different depending on whether you access it from the HBS or directly: From the HBS RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐12...
Page 284 You may chose between an uplink or downlink report. The remaining buttons have the same functionality as they do for the HBS. (There is no significance in monitoring period button label, Daily. The options are as for the HBS.) Direct or Over the Air Here, only a downlink report is available. Otherwise the buttons have the same functionality as they do for the HBS. Here is an extract from a 15 minute report. We have broken it into three pieces so that it is legible: Figure 12‐10: HSU ‐ Performance Monitoring ‐ Valid and invalid data (1 of 3) Figure 12‐11: HSU ‐ Performance Monitoring ‐ Valid and invalid data (2 of 3) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐13...
Page 285 Description Meaning Green tick for current and valid; Red cross for invalidated data (See example below). Note that the Integrity Valid data flag Performance Monitoring data is not valid if not all the values were stored (e.g., due to clock changes within the interval or power up reset) Data are recorded every 15 minutes; the last 30 days of Date & Time Time stamp recordings are maintained. Roll‐over is at midnight Unavailable Seconds in which the interface was out of service Seconds Errored The number of seconds in which there was at least one seconds error block. Severe Errored The number of seconds in which the service quality Seconds was low as determined by the BBER threshold Background The number of errored blocks in an interval Block Error The minimum of the receive signal level (measured in Min RSL (dBm) dBm) The maximum of the receive signal level (measured in Max RSL (dBm) dBm) RSL Thresh 1 (‐ The number of seconds in which the Receive Signal 88dBm) Level (RSL) was below the specified threshold. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐14...
Page 286 The number of Megabytes received at the specified Rx MBytes Mbytes port within the interval Transmitted The number of Megabytes transmitted at the specified Tx MBytes Mbytes port within the interval. Below Capacity Seconds count when throughput fell below the (0.0 Mbps) Thresh threshold set in Figure 12‐7 Above Traffic Threshold set Seconds count when actual traffic exceeded the Thresh in Figure 12‐7 threshold As for the HBS, use the Save button to store the current data to file and the Clear button to delete currently stored performance data. More on the Thresholds RSL Thresholds Two RSL Thresholds can be defined. They are used as an indicator of problems in the radio channel. You can check the RSS from the Link Budget Calculator results during installation. Values of ‐5dB and ‐8dB from the current RSS are typical. TSL Threshold A counter is maintained, of the number of second intervals during which Tx power exceeds this threshold. BBER Threshold The Background Block Error Ratio is measured as a percentage. The threshold can be set from 0.1% up to 50%. An 8% threshold is recommended. If there are no problems during the interval, then for that threshold, the recommended BBER value should be 0. Since the system provides a lossless RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐15...
Page 287: Radwin Manager Traps
RADWIN Manager Traps Ethernet service, there is throughput degradation in case of interference. The degradation is proportional to the BBER. Ethernet Thresholds ‐ Capacity This is used as a basis for checking adherence to a Service Level Agreement. It is the number of seconds count that the link capacity falls bellow the threshold. Ethernet Thresholds ‐ Traffic The number of seconds count that received traffic exceeded this threshold. It can be used to measure traffic peaks. RADWIN Manager Traps The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events, displayed in the Events Log. Table 12‐4: RADWIN Manager Trap Messages Trap Message Severity Remarks Cannot bind to trap service port. Port Warning RADWIN Manager will not catch any 162 already in use by ProcessName traps from the ODU, some other (pid: ProcessId) application has grabbed this port. Device unreachable! Error Check connectivity to ODU Connected to <site_name> Information <site_name> Site will be reset. Information Restore Factory Default Settings in Information process on Site <site_name> Factory Settings: The process was not Warning Factory setting failed due to finished due to connection issues. connectivity problem to ODU Reset: The process was not finished Warning Factory setting failed due to ...
Page 288: Active Alarms
Active Alarms Table 12‐4: RADWIN Manager Trap Messages (Continued) Trap Message Severity Remarks The Product is not identified at the Warning <remote_site_name> site. The Product is not identified at both Warning sites. Product Not Identified! Warning The Manager identified a newer ODU Warning ODU release is newer than RADWIN release at the <remote_site_name> Manager release. site. Wizards are not available. RADWIN Manager will be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the RADWIN Manager. (You will get this message as a pop up) The Manager identified a newer ODU Warning release at the <local_site_name> site. Newer Version identified at the Warning ODU release is newer than RADWIN <local_site_name> site. Manager release. Wizards are not available. RADWIN Manager will be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the RADWIN Manager. Newer Version identified at the Warning <remote_site_name> site.
Page 289: Other Diagnostic Aids
Other Diagnostic Aids Current Active Alarms may be saved to a file. The list displayed will not be updated unless you click Refresh. Other Diagnostic Aids Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is part of the RADWIN Manager software and is found in the Help menu. This useful utility enables you to calculate the expected performance of the wireless link and the possible configurations for a specific link range including antenna size, cable loss and climate conditions. For full details, see Chapter 23.  To run the Link Budget Calculator from the Windows Start Menu: • Go to Start | Programs | RADWIN Manager | Link Budget Calculator Online Help Online help can be accessed from the Help menu on the main window of the RADWIN Manager. Using most common Web browsers, it may also be run going to Start | Programs | RADWIN Manager | User Manual RADWIN 5000 Customer Service Customer support for this product can be obtained from the local VAR, Integrator or distributor from whom it was purchased. For further information, please contact the RADWIN distributor nearest to you or one of RADWIN's offices worldwide. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 12‐18...
Page 290: Part 4: Site Synchronization
Part 4: Site Synchronization Release 3.5.70...
Page 291: Chapter 13: Hub Site Synchronization
Chapter 13: Hub Site Synchronization What is Hub Site Synchronization (HSS) When several radios are collocated at a common hub site, interference may occur from one unit to another. RADWIN ODUs support the collocation of more than two units at a central site. Like any other RF deployment, the wireless operation is highly dependent on factors such as available frequencies, the physical spacing between radios, other third party interfering radios, and whether other RADWIN radios are installed. HSS does not eliminate the need for careful RF planning to ensure the design will work as planned. See Site Survey for information on installation site survey. Note RADWIN HSS The RADWIN HSS method uses carries pulses sent to each ODU, which synchronize their transmission with each other. The pulse synchronization ensures that transmission occurs at the same time for all collocated units. This also results in all of the hub site units receiving data at the same time, eliminating the possibility of interference that could result if some units transmit while other units at the same location receive. Figure 13‐1 illustrates interference caused by non‐synchronized collocated units. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 13‐1...
Page 292: Figure 13-1 Interference
RADWIN HSS Figure 13‐1: Interference caused by collocated units Adding HSS removes interference as shown in the next two figures: Figure 13‐2: Collocated units using Hub Site Synchronization (1) Figure 13‐3: Collocated units using Hub Site Synchronization (2) The units are connected to each other with HSS cables and HSS Distribution Units. One of the radios in the site is defined as HSS Master and generates synchronization pulses. The other collocated radios in the site ‐ the HSS Clients, are connected to the HSS Master and synchronize their transmission to the pulses. An HSS Client can be configured to work in one of two modes: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 13‐2...
Page 293 RADWIN HSS • HSS Client‐Continue Transmission (HSC‐CT): If the unit loses synchronization with the HSS Master, the link remains active. However, without synchronization pulses, it is pos‐ sible that this unit will cause interference. • HSS Client‐Disable Transmission (HSC‐DT): If the unit loses synchronization with the HSS Master, the link is dropped until the synchronization pulses resume. This setting prevents the unit from causing interference. The remote ODUs that are not located at the hub site, are called Independent Units (INU). RADWIN offers two types of HSS: » Serial HSS The RADWIN Serial Hub Site Synchronization (SHSS) method uses a cable connected from the master ODU to all collocated ODUs; this cable carries pulses sent to each ODU, which synchronize their transmission with each other. SHSS is covered in Chap‐ ter 14. » Ethernet HSS The Ethernet HSS (HSSoE) method requires Layer 2 Ethernet connectivity between collocated ODUs. It has two requirements: • Collocated ODUs providing Ethernet services only, should be connected to an IDU‐H instead of regular PoE devices. Other simple switches may work with degraded per‐ formance. They are not recommended and problems arising from their use will not be eligible for any kind of support. • Collocated ODUs providing E1/T1 services should use an IDU‐C or IDU‐E and then be connected to an IDU‐H functioning as a switch. One of the LAN ports on the IDU‐C or IDU‐E is connected to any of the six IDU‐H PoE ports or the two LAN ports. (This is possible because the IDU‐C or IDU‐E LAN cable only uses four pins for data; the power pins are not used so there is no risk of damage to them.) In this way, up to eight such ODUs may be collocated. You may only use one IDU‐H. That is, they may not be cascaded. Note If you are using an IDU‐C0 (GbE) it must be connected to the IDU‐H LAN port only. Connecting it to the PoE ports will damage the unit and in any event, it will not work. Caution RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 294: Hss Concepts: Radio Frame Pattern (Rfp)
HSS Concepts: Radio Frame Pattern (RFP) HSS Concepts: Radio Frame Pattern (RFP) A Radio Frame Pattern (RFP) is the cycle duration of transmit and receive of the air‐frame. Without HSS When selecting TDM or Ethernet services, the system automatically and transparently chooses the optimal RFP. When TDM and Ethernet services are configured, the RFP is optimized for TDM. RFP and HSS When HSS is used, the RFP for the collocated radios must be selected manually. RADWIN 2000 uses the Time Division Duplex (TDD) mechanism. Under HSS, TDD enables synchronization of transmission for the collocated units as shown in Figure 13‐4: Figure 13‐4: Radio Frame Pattern Two RFP types (labelled B and E) are available. Under HSS the RFP must be configured by the user depending on the type of the radio products, services and channel bandwidth in accordance with Table 13‐2. The table describe the efficiency of the air interface according to the RFP type, services and channel bandwidth. The tables may also be viewed in the RADWIN Manager and in the Link Budget Calculator. The efficiency of the air interface will vary according to the product used. Table 13‐1: Radio Frame Pattern Table ‐ RADWIN 5000 HBS RFP 5/10/20/40 MHz Ethernet Best fit Table 13‐2: Radio Frame Pattern Table ‐ RADWIN 2000 RFP 40 MHz 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Ethernet TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet Available Available Available Available Available Available Best fit Best fit...
Page 295: Which Type Of Hss To Use
RFP: General Radio Frame Pattern Table 13‐3: Legend for Radio Frame Pattern Tables Item Description Best fit Optimal RFP choice for TDM and Ethernet services Available Available RFP for TDM and Ethernet services, but not optima Service unavailable Select the RFP that gives you the Best Fit or Available for required system services and select the channel bandwidth accordingly. The RFP must be the same for each link within the collocated system. Note RFP: General Radio Frame Pattern When setting the RPF, the following considerations should be borne in mind: • When synchronizing RADWIN 5000 HBS units you must use RFP E • When synchronizing RADWIN 5000 HBS with RADWIN 2000 or WinLink 1000 units you must use RFP E • RFP influences capacity and latency. • Using the Link Budget Calculator, you can see the effect of the RFP on the Ethernet throughput. Which Type of HSS to Use You may use both forms of HSS with the HBS. There are however some limitations: • If you collocate an HBS to both a unit supporting SHSS and HSSoE, the HBS must always be HSM • If you collocate with a GSU, you can only use HSSoE and the GSU mast be HSM. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 13‐5...
Page 296: Chapter 14: Serial Hub Site Synchronization
Chapter 14: Serial Hub Site Synchronization RADWIN Serial HSS The RADWIN Serial Hub Site Synchronization (SHSS) method uses a CAT 5e cable connected from the master ODU to all collocated ODUs; this cable carries pulses sent to each ODU, which synchronize their transmission with each other. Since the SHSS unit is still shown in the RADWIN Catalog as an “HSS unit”, in the remainder of this chapter we will continue with this convention on the clear understanding that we are dealing only with SHSS. Hardware Installation Connecting an HSS Unit A single HSS unit supports up to ten collocated ODUs. In addition to each unit being connected to its IDU or PoE device, the collocated unit has an additional cable that is connected to the HSS Unit. The HSS Unit is a compact, weatherproof (IP67) connector box that is installed on the same mast as the ODUs. All collocated units connect to this box using CAT‐5e cable. Cables in prepared lengths are available for purchase. The HSS unit is supplied with ten protective covers; any port not in use must be closed with a protective cover. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐1...
Page 297 Connecting an HSS Unit Figure 14‐1: HSS Interconnection Unit • For a single HSS unit, ensure that the collocated units are connected in sequence from SYNC 1. If an ODU is removed from the hub site, then all remaining ODUs must be reconnected to maintain the connectivity. • You may cascade (daisy‐chain) two or more HSS Units with an HSS Note cable. The method is described in detail below.  To connect an ODU to an HSS unit: 1. Unscrew the protective cover from the port marked SYNC 1. 2. Connect the RJ‐45 connector from one end of the prepared CAT‐5e cable to SYNC 1. 3. Connect the other end of the CAT‐5e cable to the ODU connector labeled SYNC. 4. Tighten the protective seal that is on the prepared cable over the RJ‐45 connector. 5. Repeat for all ODUs that are to be collocated at the hub site. The next ODU to be connected is inserted in SYNC 1, SYNC 2, followed by SYNC 3 and so on. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐2...
Page 298: Figure 14-3 Hss Sync Signal
Using a Single HSS Unit Using a Single HSS Unit Figure 14‐2: HSS Wiring schematic The wiring, as shown in Figure 14‐2 is self explanatory. The Sync signal path is less self evident. If we set ODU 1 (on SYNC 1) to HSS Master, then the Sync signal path is as shown in Figure 14‐3. The signal travels from ODU 1 to SYNC 1, from SYNC 1 to SYNC 2, from SYNC 2 to ODU 2 and back again. The back and forth paths repeat for the second to fourth ODU, from left to right. The signal exits the HSS unit at SYNC 5 and terminates in ODU 5. The choice of the ODU on SYNC 1 as HSS master is not mandatory, but is good practice. If for example we were to use ODU 3 as HSS master, the Sync signal path would be ODU 3 to SYNC 3, then left and right to SYNC 2 and SYNC 4. It would then propagate to ODUs 2 and 4, terminating at both ODUs 1 and 5. Figure 14‐3: HSS sync signal path with ODU 1 as HSS Master Using More than One HSS Unit In a large collocation site, several HSS units may be cascaded (daisy‐chained) subject to the following conditions: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐3...
Page 299: Figure 14-4 Cascading Two
Using More than One HSS Unit Condition 1: Cabling Sequence 1. Up to nine ODUs may be connected to the first HSS unit using HSS ports SYNC 1, SYNC 2, SYNC 3,... up to SYNC 9 in order without leaving empty ports. 2. The next available SYNC port of the first HSS unit should be connected to SYNC 10 of the second HSS unit as shown in Figure 14‐4. In the illustration, the next available port on the first HSS unit is SYNC 6. 3. The second HSS unit may be filled out with up to nine more ODUs in reverse order. That is, connect SYNC 9, SYNC 8, SYNC 7... as shown in Figure 14‐4. Figure 14‐4: Cascading two HSS units 4. To add a a further HSS unit: Connect the next available SYNC port from the second HSS unit in descending order (SYNC 5 in Figure 14‐4) to SYNC 1 of the third HSS unit. ODUs are connected to the third HSS unit from SYNC 2 as shown in Figure 14‐5, in ascending order: Figure 14‐5: Cascading three HSS units RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐4...
Page 300: Sector Configuration And Hss
Lmn denote the length of the ODU‐HSS unit cable at SYNC n on HSS unit m Hm be the length of the cable joining HSS unit m to HSS unit m+1 One HSS unit with five collocated ODUs    PathLength Two cascaded HSS units as shown in Figure 14‐4    PathLength     Three cascaded HSS units as shown in Figure 14‐5    PathLength         ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout See Table B‐3. Sector Configuration and HSS The Hub Site Synchronization Settings dialog box appears in the HBS Site Configuration window. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐5...
Page 301 Sector Configuration and HSS Figure 14‐6: HSS Settings window If you click the Enabled box and choose Serial or Serial and Ethernet: The central display (with Operational state opened) will look like this: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐6...
Page 302: Sync Status Messages And Color Codes
Sync Status Messages and Color Codes Figure 14‐7: Setting HBS as HSM or HSC Continue Tx means that the HBS as a client to continue to work if there is no HSM pulse. If you select Hub Sync Master and click Apply, the display changes again: Figure 14‐8: HBS as HSM Setting up the HBS as a client is carried out in a similar manner. Sync Status Messages and Color Codes The possible External Pulses conditions are shown in the following table: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐7...
Page 303 Sync Status Messages and Color Codes Table 14‐1: External Pulse Status Color HSS Sync Status Meaning code ODU is HSM and generates the sync pulse Generating ODU is HSC and detects the sync pulse Green Detected ODU is independent Not detected Generating and HSM, but other HSM present detected Generating and RADWIN 5000 HBS is HSM, but detects a WinLink 1000 or Orange Improperly RRADWIN 2000 HSM signal that is not RFP E Detected HSC but no HSM present Not detected HSC but HSM pulse doesn’t fit the HSC as configured. Occurs Improperly detected only for RADWIN 5000 HBS, which stops transmitting. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 14‐8...
Page 304: Chapter 15: Hub Site Synchronization Over Ethernet
Chapter 15: Hub Site Synchronization over Ethernet RADWIN Ethernet HSS Ethernet HSS Requirements The RADWIN Ethernet Hub Site Synchronization (HSSoE) method provides intra‐site synchronization without the need for external cables or an HSS unit. Sync signals are exchanged between collocated radios over the regular Ethernet connection. The Ethernet HSS (HSSoE) method requires Layer 2 Ethernet connectivity between collocated ODUs. It has two requirements: • Collocated ODUs providing Ethernet services only, should be connected to an IDU‐H instead of regular PoE devices. Other simple switches may work with degraded per‐ formance. They are not recommended and problems arising from their use will not be eligible for any kind of support. • Collocated RADWIN 2000 class ODUs providing E1/T1 services should use an IDU‐C or IDU‐E and then be connected to an IDU‐H functioning as a switch. One of the LAN ports on the IDU‐C or IDU‐E is connected to any of the six IDU‐H PoE ports or the two LAN ports. (This is possible because the IDU‐C or IDU‐E LAN cable only uses four pins for data; the power pins are not used so there is no risk of damage to them.) In this way, up to eight such ODUs may be collocated. You may only use one IDU‐H. That is, they may not be cascaded. Note If you are using an IDU‐C0 (GbE) it must be connected to the IDU‐H LAN port only. Connecting it to the P0E ports will damage the unit and in any event, it will not work. Caution RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐1...
Page 305 HSSoE Concepts VLAN Tagging should not use the VLAN ID used by HSSoE and vice versa. Caution HSSoE Concepts Sync Frames Sync frames are exchanged between collocated ODUs using Layer‐2 broadcasting. Domain To prevent network flooding, each group of collocated ODUs is configured with an internal “domain name”. The default name must be changed to prevent sync frames being received over the LAN by another ODU, which could be then mistakenly configured as a client of an HSM at the wrong location. Discovery Discovery by the HSM and HSCs is provided using the following choice of filters: Using discovery at the HSM, you can select only those HSCs in the HSM’s domain; when configuring a new HSC you may use discovery to pick the correct HSM. VLAN VLAN is used to separate sync frames from traffic so as to give sync frames highest priority. If you have collocated ODUs running close to full capacity, failure to do so, would result in excessive jitter and dropped traffic frames. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐2...
Page 306: Installing Collocated Hssoe Odus
Installing Collocated HSSoE ODUs By default, the VLAN ID 1997 and priority 7 are reserved for HSS. You may change the VLAN ID but not the priority. Installing Collocated HSSoE ODUs Ethernet Services Only Use an IDU‐H for the collocated ODUs instead of separate PoE devices. The IDU‐H has two LAN ports, one of which will be connected to a switch. Ethernet and TDM Services For RADWIN 2000 class ODUs: To attain Layer 2 connectivity for up to two such ODUs, you should connect one of the two the IDU‐C (or IDU‐E) LAN ports to the IDU‐H LAN ports. You may use the second IDU‐C (or IDU‐E) LAN port to connect to a switch. As pointed out earlier, you may only collocate two ODUs in this way. Link Configuration and HSSoE Setup for Illustration We will show how to set up our demonstration link from Managing the Sector as HSM and HSC in turn. (The second collocated link is a RADWIN 2000 SCB, the setup details of which, need not concern us). Configuring the HBS as an HSM  To configure the Master ODU as EHSS Master: 1. Log on to the HBS. 2. Open the Configure | Hub Site Sync tab. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐3...
Page 307 Configuring the HBS as an HSM Figure 15‐1: HSS Settings window 3. Check the Enabled box. The grayed out bottom part of the window in Figure 15‐1 is enabled. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐4...
Page 308: Figure 15-2 Extended Protocol
Configuring the HBS as an HSM Figure 15‐2: Extended Protocol Parameters for HSSoE 4. Leave the Operation state as is at Hub Sync Master. Here is the full range of options: Later, we will need one of the client options for the collocated site. 5. The Protocol should be left as is at Ethernet. (For the moment, there are no other options.) 6. The Domain is the HSS domain and refers to the current hub site. It is used to distinguish between hub sites to prevent inadvertent collocation to an over‐the‐air unit. We set it as shown, to PM_Lab. 7. Leave the VLAN ID as is at 1977 unless there is some reason to change it. 8. The Discovery options are as follows: Figure 15‐3: HSS discovery filters 9. Choose All. In our case it will show the HBS as HSM and the collocated ODU as HSC: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐5...
Page 309 Configuring the HBS as an HSM You can save the results to a text file or change the display type from the Discovery window tool bar: The choices are the same as for Figure 15‐3. 10. Use the OK or Apply buttons to commit your changes. Here is the outcome: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐6...
Page 310 Configuring the HBS as an HSM 11. Click the Details button. A table of other Ethernet HSMs with the same domain is displayed: This is a mistake: There should not be a second HSM in this domain. Change it to be HSC and the display is updated: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐7...
Page 311 Configuring the Master ODU as an HSC Notice additional HSC at IP address 10.104.3.2: It is collocated to the foregoing radios using an HSS unit connected to theHBS. Configuring the Master ODU as an HSC We switch HSS roles between our HBS and the collocated RADWIN 2000 SCB.  To configure the Master ODU as EHSS Master: 1. Follow steps 1 to 4 for configuring the HSM. 2. At step 5 for HSM, choose Hub Sync Client ‐ Continue Tx. Here is the outcome: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐8...
Page 312: Sync Status Messages And Color Codes
Sync Status Messages and Color Codes Note that the IP address of the HSM is displayed for confirmation. Sync Status Messages and Color Codes The possible External Pulses conditions are shown in the following table: Table 15‐1: External Pulse Status Color HSS Sync Status Meaning code ODU is HSM and generates the sync pulse Generating ODU is HSC and detects the sync pulse Green Detected ODU is independent Not detected Generating and HSM, but other HSM present detected Generating and RADWIN 2000 SCB is HSM, but detects RRADWIN 2000 HSM Orange Improperly signal that is not RFP E Detected HSC but no HSM present Not detected HSC but HSM pulse doesn’t fit the HSC as configured. Occurs Improperly detected only for RADWIN 2000 C, which stops transmitting. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 15‐9...
Page 313: Chapter 16: Using The Radwin Gsu
Chapter 16: Using the RADWIN GSU What is it for The GPS‐based synchronization unit (GSU) is designed to handle inter‐site interferences under large‐scale deployment scenarios. The GSU is an outdoor unit consisting of a small size enclosure, a GPS antenna and a PoE device. It may be operated through an HSS unit or over Ethernet. For use over Ethernet, the GSU requires Layer 2 connectivity to the multiple Hub‐Sites that it is required to synchronize. It synchronizes the transmission timing of these Hub‐Sites to the same clock source thus eliminating mutual interference. Typically, an IDU‐H is used. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 16‐1...
Page 314: Gsu Functionality
GSU Functionality Figure 16‐1: General GSU configuration using both Ethernet and an HSS unit GSU Functionality The GSU receives a synchronization signal from the GPS once per second. It distributes a RADWIN proprietary synchronization signal to all other ODU units using a proprietary synchronization signal over Ethernet. When the GSU doesn’t receive a synchronization signal from the GPS for 30 seconds, it moves automatically to Self‐Generation mode until the GPS recovers. GSU Kit Contents The GSU package includes: • 1 x GSU • 1 x GSU Mounting Kit • 1 x GPS Antenna • 1 x GPS Antenna Mounting Kit RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 16‐2...
Page 315: Commissioning And Installation
Commissioning and Installation • 1 x RF Cable, 1.5m • RADWIN Manager supplied either on CD or by electronic means Commissioning and Installation Preparing the GSU for Use At the depot, log on to the unit using Local Connection or IP address 10.0.0.120 to change its IP address from the default (10.0.0.120). The method is the same as is used for an HBS. In the example screen captures below, we use 10.104.20.1 with Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 and Gateway 10.104.10.21. GSU Installation The GSU looks like a small form factor ODU. Mounting the GSU follows the standard pattern. The GPS antenna is mounted outside on a wall or pole. Configuring the GSU Getting Started To configure the GSU, you log on to it, exactly as in Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager. The GSU Main Window Here is the main window for GSU configuration: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 16‐3...
Page 316: Figure 16-3 Gps Status Under
Configuring the GSU Figure 16‐2: GSU Main widow at startup The GPS satellite data is contained in the bottom left panel: Figure 16‐3: GPS status under normal use RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 16‐4...
Page 317 Configuring the GSU The Configuration Window Figure 16‐4: GSU Configuration window The main tabs of interest are Management, Hub Site Sync and GPS Sync. The Management tab is the same as the corresponding HBS Management tab. If you set the IP and related addresses correctly, there should be little to change here (see Management). The other three tabs, Trap Destination, VLAN and Protocol also have the same function here. In the Hub Site Sync window, ensure that it is enabled and the Domain item set to be the same as the corresponding item in Figure 15‐2. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 16‐5...
Page 318 Configuring the GSU The GPS Sync tab allows you to choose an RFP (see HSS Concepts: Radio Frame Pattern (RFP)) and set the Transmission Ratio for the sector. Its value is application dependent: (The reason that this is done at the GSU is that Transmission Ratio must always be determined at the unit generating the sync pulses.) For administrative purposes, you can view the Inventory: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 16‐6...
Page 319 Configuring the GSU RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 16‐7...
Page 320: Part 5: Advanced Installation Topics
Part 5: Advanced Installation Topics Release 3.5.70...
Page 321: Chapter 17: Software Backup And Upgrade
Chapter 17: Software Backup and Upgrade What is the Software Upgrade Utility? The RADWIN Manager provides a Software Upgrade Utility (SWU) to upgrade the software (firmware) of installed ODUs in a network. The update files may be located anywhere accessible by the operator. The SWU provides for: • Prior backup of the current files prior to upgrade • Upgrade from a list • Delayed upgrade • Various ODU reset options The default location of the software files is in the installation area, and can be used to restore factory defaults. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 17‐1...
Page 322: Upgrading An Installed Sector
Upgrading an Installed Sector Upgrading an Installed Sector  To upgrade software for a link: 1. In the RADWIN Manager, click the Software Upgrade button.The following detached window appears: Figure 17‐1: Software Upgrade Utility ‐ Main window The default sites shown in the Software Upgrade list panel belong to the currently installed sector. The list may be empty if you are running the RADWIN Manager “offline”. 2. The Software upgrade list title bar has three buttons on the right hand side. Figure 17‐2: Add / Remove site buttons The left button opens up a Windows file dialog to locate a list of locations to update. The list has the following format: <IP address>,<Read‐Only community>,<Read‐Write community> For example: 10.104.50.200,netman 10.104.50.4,netman 10.104.50.2,netman 10.104.50.1,netman 10.104.50.3,netman RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 17‐2...
Page 323: Figure 17-3 Adding Asingle
Upgrading an Installed Sector The list should include HBSs and HSUs able to accept the same upgrade. This is unlikely to be a problem unless you are using equipment prior to the 3.3.00 release of RADWIN 5000. Non‐upgradable items will result in an error message. Contact Cus‐ tomer Service about upgrading them. The center button allows you to add a single site: Figure 17‐3: Adding a single site for upgrade Enter the IP address of the site, the Read‐Write Community (Default: netman) and then click OK. The site will appear in the Software Upgrade list box. Items from the list can be cleared by selecting them and then using the right button. The right button in Figure 17‐3, may be ruse to remove one or more selected sites. 3. Having created an update list, click Upgrade Package to chose the relevant files. The default files are located in the SWU subdirectory in the RADWIN Manager installation area. You may see one or more of the following SWU files: Table 17‐1: SWU Files by product File name Product SWU_1k.swu WinLink 1000 SWU_2k.swu RADWIN 2000 SWU_5k.swu RADWIN 5000 SWU_gs.swu RADWIN GSU For RADWIN 5000, always choose SWU_5k.swu. 4. To back up your existing system, check Backup device software check‐box. Then click the button for a standard file dialog. The default location is the My Documents directory on the managing computer or the last backup directory you used. The backup here is the same as that on page 8‐1, and serves the same purpose. It provides a fallback if the upgrade proves problematic. Further information about the backup utility is provided on page 17‐5. Note RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 324 Upgrading an Installed Sector 5. In addition to the previous step, you may opt to perform a delayed upgrade. Check the Delayed Upgrade box, and enter the date and time for the delayed upgrade. A Calendar dialog box opens: 6. The radio buttons on the right determines how your HSUs should be reset. Bear in mind that on the one hand, a reset involves a service interruption, but on the other hand, the software upgrade will not become effective until after the reset is carried out. Here is a typical delayed upgrade scenario: 7. Click Start Upgrade to commence the process. For an immediate upgrade you will be able to observe the upgrade progress from the green progress bars: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 17‐4...
Page 325: Bulk Software Backup
Bulk Software Backup Figure 17‐4: Software upgrade in progress ‐ Note the stop button Figure 17‐5: Software upgrade completed successfully 8. Use the title bar exit button to dismiss the Software upgrade window.. If any sites fail to update, a warning notice will be displayed. If one or more sites of a sector update fails, you should correct the problem and update the failed sites as soon as possible. If you do not, following the next reset of the updated sites, you could experience a link software Caution mismatch which may affect service. Bulk Software Backup You can back up the sector software independently of Software Upgrade using the HBS main button menu. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 17‐5...
Page 326: Figure 17-6 Bulk Backup Setup
Bulk Software Backup The Bulk Backup tab opens the following window: Figure 17‐6: Bulk Backup setup window The method of selection, addition or removal of items follows the same pattern as in SWU selection, Figure 17‐1. Save configuration produces a text file in the format for upgrading an installed sector, as in the example on page 17‐2. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 17‐6...
Page 327: Chapter 18: Vlan Functionality With Radwin 5000 Hpmp
Chapter 18: VLAN Functionality with RADWIN 5000 HPMP VLAN Tagging ‐ Overview VLAN Terminology Both the technical literature and the RADWIN Manager use the terms VLAN ID and VID interchangeably to denote a VLAN identification number. VLAN Background Information on the Web The standards defining VLAN Tagging are IEEE_802.1Q and extensions. For general background about VLAN see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Virtual_LAN. Background information about Double Tagging also known as QinQ may be found here: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/802.1QinQ. Scope of this Chapter This chapter describes how the components of a RADWIN 5000 HPMP sector deal with tagging and untagging. Requirements It is assumed that you are familiar with VLAN usage and terminology. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐1...
Page 328: Vlan Tagging
VLAN Tagging VLAN Tagging VLAN tagging enables multiple bridged networks to transparently share the same physical network link without leakage of information between networks: Figure 18‐1: VLAN scenarios handled by RADWIN 5000 HBS IEEE 802.1Q is used as the encapsulation protocol to implement this mechanism over Ethernet networks. QinQ (Double Tagging) for Service Providers QinQ is useful for Service Providers, allowing them to use VLANs internally in their “transport network” while mixing Ethernet traffic from clients that are already VLAN‐tagged. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐2...
Page 329: Figure 18-2 Separating Client
VLAN Untagging Figure 18‐2: Separating client data streams using double tagging The outer tag (representing the Provider VLAN) comes first, followed by the inner tag. In QinQ the EtherType = 0x9100. VLAN tags may be stacked three or more deep. When using this type of “Provider Tagging” you should keep the following in mind: • Under Provider Tagging, the system double‐tags egress frames towards the Provider’s network. The system adds a tag with a VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100 to all frames, as configured by the service provider (Provider VLAN ID). • The system always adds to each frame, tags with VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100. Therefore, • For a frame without a tag – the system will add a tag with VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100 so the frame will have one tag • For a frame with a VLAN tag – the system will add a tag with VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100 so the frame will be double‐tagged For a frame with a VLAN tag and a provider tag – the system will add a tag with VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100 so the frame will be triple‐tagged and so on. At the egress side, the HSU removes the QinQ tag with EtherType = 0x9100 no matter what the value of its VLAN ID. VLAN Untagging VLAN Untagging means the removal of a VLAN or a Provider tag. Port Functionality In a RADWIN 5000 sector, all VLAN activity is configured and supported from the HSUs. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐3...
Page 330 Port Functionality To this end, VLAN functionality is supported at the MNG port of the HSU. The HSU MNG port can be configured to handle Ethernet frames at the ingress direction (where frames enter the HSU) and at the egress direction (where frames exit the HSU). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐4...
Page 331 Priority Code Point (PCP) which refers to the IEEE 802.1p priority. It indicates the frame priority level from 0 (lowest) to 7 (highest), which can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic (voice, video, data, etc). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐5...
Page 332: Vlan Configuration Using The Radwin Manager
VLAN Configuration Using the RADWIN Manager Egress Direction Table 18‐2: Port settings ‐ Egress direction The port ‘does nothing’ with regard to VLANs ‐ outbound frames are left Transparent untouched. Port configured to untag user VLAD tags for all frames. Untag all Filter VLAN Configuration Using the RADWIN Manager If you are not a VLAN expert, please be aware that incorrect VLAN configuration may cause havoc on your network. The facilities described below are offered as a service to enable you to get best value from your RADWIN 5000 HPMP links and are provided “as is”. Under no circumstances Disclaimer does RADWIN accept responsibility for network system or financial damages arising from incorrect use of these VLAN facilities. Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation You can define a VLAN ID for management traffic separation. You should configure the system to prevent conflicts as detailed below. When configured for the default operational mode, a “Provider port” will handle ingress traffic as follows: • Filters frames that are not tagged with the Provider VLAN ID • Removes the Provider double tag Therefore, if a port is configured for management traffic separation by VLAN and as ‘Provider port’, then the received management frames must be double tagged as follows: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐6...
Page 333 Managing the HBS over the Air from an HSU • The outer tag has to be the Provider’s tag (so the frame is not filtered) • The internal tag has to be management VLAN ID To avoid mix‐ups, best practice is to: • Separate the management and data ports • Define only a data port with Provider function Managing the HBS over the Air from an HSU If traffic VLAN tagging is in force for the HSU ingress direction and management VLAN is in use at the HBS, then the VLAN ID at the HSU ingress direction must be the same as the VLAN ID for management at the HBS. Configuration of VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service VLAN configuration is carried out per HSU. It is up to you to ensure consistency between the HSUs. HSU VLAN tagging can only be configured from one of the HSU views from the HBS. You can not log on to an HSU directly and do it from the HSU main window. The reason is that the HSU maintains the HSU tagging information in its internal per HSU configuration record.  To set up an HSU for VLAN tagging: 1. Right click an HSU on the HBS window, and then click Configure | Ethernet | VLAN Configuration. The VLAN Configuration window is displayed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐7...
Page 334 Configuration of VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service In Disabled mode, Ethernet frames pass transparently over the radio links. 2. For Provider tagging, click the Provider Radio button: In Provider mode, Ethernet frames are tagged with the provider’s VLAN ID before they enter into the provider’s network/backbone. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐8...
Page 335 Configuration of VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service 3. Enter a Provider VLAN ID and Priority. The VLAN ID must be in the range 2 to 4094. The VLAN Priority must be in the range 0 to 7. You may also change the TPID from the default as shown. This facility is provided to enable connection through legacy switches requiring it. Otherwise, there is no need to change the TPID. Note 4. Click OK to accept. 5. For user VLAN tagging, click the Tag Radio button: In Tag mode Ethernet frames are tagged or untagged to distinguish between differ‐ ent networks. 6. For completely transparent passage of tagged frames, there is nothing further to do. The following table shows the possible settings for each combination of Ingress and Egress modes: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐9...
Page 336 Frames are Allow up to 4 VIDs not modified to be passed All frames with Allow up to 4 VIDs and are through. VLAN tag are to be passed Transparent forwarded Untag VLAN IDs: untagged through. transparentl Untag the VLAN tag of the selected VLAN IDs. Frames are Tag: not modified All frames with Allow up to 4 VIDs Allow up to 4 VIDs and are Enter a VID (1‐ VLAN tag are to be passed to be passed 4094) and forwarded untagged through through transparentl Priority (0‐7) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 18‐10...
Page 337: Chapter 19: False Radar Mitigation Facilities
Chapter 19: False Radar Mitigation Facilities Who needs it If you are using DFS frequency bands 5.3/5.4 GHz ETSI and 5.4/5.8GHz FCC you should use this facility. DFS and False Radar Mitigation About DFS Under DFS frequency bands, it must be ensured that radio links do not interfere with certain radar systems in the 5 GHz band. If radar is detected, the radio link should move automatically to a frequency that does not interfere with the detected radar. What is False Radar Mitigation False Radar Mitigation capability is an advanced method to reduce or eliminate false radar detection and DFS triggering (“False positives”). False radar detection can be caused by other radios transmissions or external interference that can be interpreted as true radar. This option is active only in DFS frequency bands, 5.3/5.4 GHz FCC (HBS only) and 5.4/5.8GHz ETSI (HBS & HSU). In what follows false radar means any source of radar‐like signals which are not real radar. False Radar Mitigation has two components: 1. Reduction of false positive radar detection by reduction of the probability of detecting any kind of false radars, while allowing the system to detect real radar signals. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 19‐1...
Page 338: Configuring False Radar Mitigation
Configuring False Radar Mitigation 2. Elimination of detection of specific false radar types by blocking detection of false radars of a specific type. There are three types of radars: • Fixed: False radars with fixed pulse width having fixed repetition frequency • Variable: False radars with variable pulse width having variable repetition frequency • Staggered: False radars with variable repetition frequency within a burst period (Applies to 5.4 GHz ETSI only) Configuring False Radar Mitigation The configuration method for the HBS (ETSI and FCC/IC) is the same as for the HSUs (ETSI only). We will demonstrate the HBS for a sector using the 5.3 GHz FCC/IC band:  To configure False Radar Mitigation: 1. Log on to the HBS as Installer. 2. Enter the Configuration window and open the Advanced tab. Figure 19‐1: False Radar Mitigation RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 19‐2...
Page 339: Fcc/Ic Requirements
FCC/IC Requirements 3. The DFS Frequency Status Table at the bottom of Figure 19‐1 shows the time, type and frequency of the last radars detected. This table should be used to select the best option(s) to reduce or eliminate false radar detection without completely blocking out real radar detection. 4. Check the mitigation features to be used. 5. When you are satisfied with your configuration parameters, click OK to save them and dismiss the Configuration window. FCC/IC Requirements The FCC requires that devices installed within 35 km of any Terminal Doppler Weather Radars (TDWR) location should be registered in the voluntary WISPA sponsored database.For convenience, we supply guidelines about the way this is done in Chapter 20. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 19‐3...
Page 340: Chapter 20: Fcc/Ic Dfs Considerations
Chapter 20: FCC/IC DFS Considerations FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration The FCC requires that devices installed within 35 km of any TDWR location should be registered in the voluntary WISPA sponsored database. The FCC has published a TDWR Location Information table that lists the exact location of all TDWR towers (see Table 20‐1 at the end of the chapter). 1. When installing a 5.4 GHz device define your exact location (latitude and longitude) 2. Use the TDWR Location Information table to determine if the distance between the device and any TDWR tower is less than 35 km. 3. If the distance is less than 35 km then register the device in the voluntary WISPA sponsored database (following section) 4. Disable the frequencies between 5570 – 5680 MHz from the available channels list. 5. The frequency range between 5.600 to 5.650 GHz is not included in the available channels list. Registering the Device  To register a device: 1. Enter the website http://www.spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx and follow the instructions. At your first entry into the site, you will be required to register as a user: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 20‐1...
Page 341 Registering the Device 2. Click the User Registration button to enter the registration page. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 20‐2...
Page 342 Registering the Device 3. Fill in the registration page and click Register. 4. To complete device registration enter the Register Device tab as shown: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 20‐3...
Page 343 Registering the Device You are offered this: 5. Fill in the required information in the preceding web page and click the Register Device button. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 20‐4...
Page 344: Tdwr Table
371 113 NC CHARLOTTE W 080 53 06 N 35 20 14 5608 MHz 757 113 NC RALEIGH DURHAM W 078 41 50 N 36 00 07 5647 MHz 400 113 NJ WOODBRIDGE W 074 16 13 N 40 35 37 5620 MHz 19 113 NJ PENNSAUKEN W 075 04 12 N 39 56 57 5610 MHz 39 113 NV LAS VEGAS W 115 00 26 N 36 08 37 5645 MHz 1995 64 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 20‐5...
Page 345 36 80 TX DALLAS LOVE FIELD W 096 58 06 N 32 55 33 5608 MHz 541 80 TX LEWISVILLE DFW W 096 55 05 N 33 03 53 5640 MHz 554 31 UT SALT LAKE CITY W 111 55 47 N 40 58 02 5610 MHz 4219 80 VA LEESBURG W 077 31 46 N 39 05 02 5605 MHz 361 113 WI MILWAUKEE W 088 02 47 N 42 49 10 5603 MHz 820 113 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 20‐6...
Page 346: Chapter 21: Quality Of Service
Chapter 21: Quality of Service Prerequisites To use the facility you must be familiar with the use of VLAN (802.1p) or Diffserv. QoS ‐ Overview QoS is a technique for prioritization of network traffic packets during congestion. RADWIN 5000 sectors support two classification criteria, VLAN based or Diffserv based. You may choose which of them to use. Table 21‐1: Default priorities an d allocation by VLAN ID and Diffserv Priority Quality queue Diffserv VLAN 48‐63 6‐7 Real time Near real time (responsive 32‐47 4‐5 applications) 16‐31 2‐3 Controlled load 0‐15 0‐1 Best effort Based upon the classification criterion chosen, received packets will be mapped into one of four quality groups: Real time, Near real time, Controlled load and Best effort. You may partition the total link capacity across the four Quality queues. The default weights as percentages are shown in Table 21‐1. Setting up QoS QoS for RADWIN 5000 is set up in two phases: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 21‐1...
Page 347 Setting up the HBS for QoS 1. The required queues for the sector and their respective priority mappings must be chosen. 2. For each HSU you must configure the required queues, queue weights and queue Maxi‐ mum Information Rate (MIR). The latter must be done for both the Uplink and Downlink directions. Setting up the HBS for QoS From the HBS manager, enter Configuration, open the Ethernet tab and then QoS configuration. QoS is disabled by default. You may choose between the VLAN (802.1p) and Diffserv methods. The default settings for Diffserv and VLAN are as shown in the next two figures: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 21‐2...
Page 348 Setting up an HSU for QoS If you un‐check a queue, it will be disabled for the sector. It will not prevent the HSU from configuring it as “live”. The purpose behind this is to avoid the necessity of reconfiguring QoS for each HSU, should the queue be reinstated. Setting up an HSU for QoS QoS setup for an HSU is carried out from the HBS.  To configure an HSU for QoS: 1. Right click an HSU in the HBS manager HSU window, and choose Configuration. 2. Open the Ethernet tab and click QoS Configuration. The following window is displayed: 3. Ensure that the Mode field is Enabled. If you already configured the HBS (sector) for Diffserv or VLAN, then it will be enabled by default. If you need to change the mode, then you probably did not set the sector wide QoS type ‐ but you can go back and do it later. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 21‐3...
Page 349 Setting up an HSU for QoS 4. For each queue, both downlink and uplink (from the HSU) enter the required weight and MIR. The latter may be left unlimited. in which case the system will use a “best effort” method. If you exceed 100% total weight, you will receive an error message. You will be required to correct this before leaving the window other than by cancel‐ lation. If you are under‐booked, for example by setting a queue to zero, the unused weight will be distributed to the remaining queues. The effect of doing this will only become apparent under congestion. In particular, a queue set to zero weight will become nearly blocked under congestion with packets passing through on a best effort basis. 5. Using the Configurable TTL: Configurable Time‐to‐Live (TTL) is typically used for streaming applications like manned video surveillance. A packet not transmitted within the TTL period in a congested link is dropped. In the manned video surveillance example, the loss of packets under congestion is less important than acquiring the most recent packets. The choice of the TTL duration is therefore, dependent on the tolerance of the user application to transmission “glitches”. 6. When you complete your entries, click OK to save them and continue. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 21‐4...
Page 350: Chapter 22: Capacity Upgrade
Chapter 22: Capacity Upgrade What is Capacity Upgrade An HSU may have its capacity increased by application of an upgrade license key. The currently available upgrade paths are 5 Mbps to 10 Mbps, 5 Mbps to 25 Mbps and 10 Mbps to 25 Mbps. The capacity upgrade process consists of three steps: • Data Gathering ‐ preparation of a list of HSUs for upgrade by serial number • Acquisition ‐ purchasing the upgrade license keys • Application ‐ activating the capacity upgrade using the RADWIN Manager Applicability Capacity upgrade is only available for fixed HSUs and nomadic HSUs. Data Gathering Open the sector list view: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 22‐1...
Page 351 Data Gathering Select all of the HSUs and then click the circled button. A sector list showing details of the HBS and all of the HSUs is saved to the clipboard. You may recover it as a text file in any text editor. The best view is obtained by saving it to a an empty spreadsheet. Here for example, is our demonstration configuration (with irrelevant columns “squashed” to save space): Extract a sub‐table consisting of the relevant HSUs (in our example, the red rectangles): RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 22‐2...
Page 352: Acquisition
Acquisition Prepare a table similar to Table 22‐1: Table 22‐1: HSU Capacity Upgrade List HSU Name HSU Serial Number Capacity Upgrade Key Brahms@HNU.01.01 PIN580I500A00003 Haydn@HFU.01.01 PIN580I500A00004 Mozart@HFU.01.02 PIN580I500A00005 Columns 1 is for your own convenience. Later you will copy/paste the capacity upgrade key into column 3 as a permanent convenient record. Acquisition Send the supplier of your equipment a Purchase Order for your Capacity Upgrade List (Use either the original text/spreadsheet file or column 2 of Table 22‐1). Ensure that you include a current email address for receipt of the key list. Upon completion of the order, you will receive an email with an attached list consisting of serial numbers and a licence key per serial number. The licence keys are quite long and it is important that you receive them in electronic format for subsequent copy/pasting. Application Individual HSU Capacity Upgrade The following procedure can be carried out by direct connection to an HSU (typically not active in a sector) or from the HBS. Using your completed Capacity Upgrade table (or the supplied email) and for each HSU in turn, open the Configuration | Operations window. (You may do this from the HBS or by direct connection ‐ whatever is most convenient.) Copy paste the license key to the License Key field. Click the Activate button (will becomes enabled). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 22‐3...
Page 353 Bulk (Sector) HSU Capacity Upgrade You will receive a confirmatory message if the activation succeeded or an error message if not. In the latter case, you will need to be in contact with your equipment supplier to solve the problem. Bulk (Sector) HSU Capacity Upgrade If all the HSUs are part of a sector (registered or not), you may “bulk” upgrade all of the member HSUs from the supplied text file attached to the email you received from your supplier. Save it to a convenient location for later use. Go to he Configuration | Operations window for the HBS itself (rather than each HSU separately). Use the License File option to navigate to your text file. Click the Activate button, which is now enabled. Again, pay careful attention to the confirmation or error messages. Completing the Capacity Upgrade To make the upgrade effective, each upgraded HSU must be reset. Persistency of the Capacity Upgrade The upgrade is persistent across an HSU reset. If however, you restore a capacity upgraded HSU to factory defaults, you will need to apply the capacity upgrade to it again. This further underlines the importance of saving the license keys attachment file in a safe place and maintaining a record like Table 22‐1. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 22‐4...
Page 354: Part 6: Field Installation Topics
Part 6: Field Installation Topics Release 3.5.70...
Page 355: Chapter 23: Link Budget Calculator
Chapter 23: Link Budget Calculator Overview The Link Budget Calculator is a utility for calculating the expected performance of the RADWIN 5000 HPMP wireless link within a sector and the possible configurations for a specific link range. The utility allows you to calculate the expected RSS of the link, and find the type of services and their effective throughput as a function of the link range and deployment conditions. User Input You are required to enter or choose the following parameters. Depending on the product, some of the parameters have a default value that cannot be changed. • Band, which determines frequency and regulation • HSU series used • Channel Bandwidth (currently 10 and 20MHz) • Tx Power (maximum Tx power per modulation is validated) • Antenna Type (currently dual; cannot be changed for ODU with integrated antenna) • Antenna Gain per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna) • Cable Loss per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna) • Fade Margin (currently 6dB) • Rate • Required Range and climate type Link Budget Calculator Internal Data For each product (or Regulation and Band) the calculator stores the following data required for link budget calculations: • Maximum Transmit power (per modulation) • Receiver Sensitivity (per modulation) for Ethernet service RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 356: Calculations
     32.45 PathLoss frequency RequiredRange – ExpectedFadeM ExpectedRSS Sensitivity where Sensitivity is dependent on air‐rate. Min and Max Range  MinRange is the shortest range for which ExpectedRSS MaxInputPower per air‐rate. MaxRange (with Adaptive checked) is the largest range for which  ExpectedRSS Sensitivity , at the highest air‐rate for which this relationship is true. In a link with adaptive rate this will be the actual behavior. MaxRange (for a given air‐rate) is the largest range for which  ExpectedRSS Sensitivity RequiredFadeM Service The Ethernet and configured TDM trunks throughput is calculated according to internal product algorithms. Availability The Service Availability calculation is based on the Vigants Barnett method which predicts the downtime probability based on a climate factor (C factor). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐2...
Page 357: About The Fresnel Zone
 ---------------------------------- - ---------------------------------------- - frequency  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - which gives ExpectedRange ExpectedRange ---------------------------------------- - ---------------------------------------- - ExpectedRange  0.52 ---------------------------------------- - simplifying to frequency ExpectedRange ---------------------------------------- - – The boresight clearance height is calculated as: Mean Mean 6367.4425Km where Mean About the Fresnel Zone The Fresnel zone (pronounced "frA‐nel", with a silent “s”) is an elliptically shaped conical zone of electromagnetic energy that propagates from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna. It is always widest in the middle of the path between the two antennas. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐3...
Page 358: Figure 23-1 Fresnel Zone
About the Fresnel Zone Figure 23‐1: Fresnel zone Fresnel loss is the path loss occurring from multi‐path reflections from reflective surfaces such as water, and intervening obstacles such as buildings or mountain peaks within the Fresnel zone. Radio links should be designed to accommodate obstructions and atmospheric conditions, weather conditions, large bodies of water, and other reflectors and absorbers of electromagnetic energy. The Fresnel zone provides us with a way to calculate the amount of clearance that a wireless wave needs from an obstacle to ensure that the obstacle does not attenuate the signal. There are infinitely many Fresnel zones located coaxially around the center of the direct wave. The outer boundary of the first Fresnel zone is defined as the combined path length of all paths, which are half wavelength (1/2 ) of the frequency transmitted longer than the direct path. If the total path distance is one wavelength (1 ) longer than the direct path, then the outer boundary is said to be two Fresnel zones. Odd number Fresnel zones reinforce the direct wave path signal; even number Fresnel zones cancel the direct wave path signal. The amount of the Fresnel zone clearance is determined by the wavelength of the signal, the path length, and the distance to the obstacle. For reliability, point‐to‐point links are designed to have at least 60% of the first Fresnel zone clear to avoid significant attenuation. The concept of the Fresnel zone is shown in Figure 23‐1 above. The top of the obstruction does not extend far into the Fresnel zone, leaving 60% of the Fresnel zone clear; therefore, the signal is not significantly attenuated. For more about Fresnel zone, see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fresnel_zone. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐4...
Page 359: Running The Link Budget Calculator
Running the Link Budget Calculator Running the Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is supplied on the RADWIN Manager CD. It may be run stand‐ alone from the CD or from the RADWIN Manager application.  To run the Link Budget Calculator from the CD: 1. Insert the RADWIN Manager CD into the drive on the managing computer. In the win‐ dow which opens, click the Link Budget Calculator option. 2. If the CD autorun application does not start by itself, then point your browser to Z:\RADWIN\Setup\DATA\Link Budget Calculator.htm where Z should be replaced with your own CD drive name.  To run the Link Budget Calculator from the RADWIN Manager: • Choose Help | Link Budget Calculator from the main menu of the RADWIN Manager: Figure 23‐2: Accessing the Link Budget Calculator  To run the Link Budget Calculator from the Windows Start Menu: • Go to Start | Programs | RADWIN Manager | Link Budget Calculator However invoked, your browser displays the following page (shown partially): Figure 23‐3: Link Budget window ‐ startup RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐5...
Page 360 Running the Link Budget Calculator • Microsoft Internet Explorer users may see a warning message like this: Note • Click the yellow bar and follow the instructions to allow blocked con‐ tent.  To use the Link Budget Calculator for RADWIN 5000 HPMP: 1. Click the RADWIN 5000 tab. Figure 23‐4: RADWIN 5000 HPMP LBC main window 2. Chose the required RADWIN 5000 HPMP band. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐6...
Page 361: Figure 23-5 Band Selector
Running the Link Budget Calculator Figure 23‐5: Band selector For the purposes of our example, we will use 5.730‐5.845 GHz FCC/IC Connectorized. • This release supports 5/10/20/40MHz Channel Bandwidths • Collocated HBSs use RFP E so there is no HSS entry Note 3. Enter the radio details. The Fade margin is the minimum required for line‐of‐sight (LOS) conditions. For degraded link conditions, a larger Fade margin should be used. The EIRP is given in dBm and Watts. 4. The Rate item may be used for calculating the Link Budget under best and worst scenarios. In practice, HBSs are configured for Adaptive rate which may not be disabled. 5. If the required range between the two link sites is known, you may enter it directly. Alternatively, you may enter the latitude and longitude of each site in the link, in which case the distance between them will be calculated and displayed. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐7...
Page 362: Figure 23-6 Calculation Of
Running the Link Budget Calculator Figure 23‐6: Calculation of distance from site coordinates If for example, we enter: Site A: 41.1°N lat 75.2°W Long Site B: 40.8°N lat 75.0°W Long and press Set, the range will be calculated and displayed: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐8...
Page 363: Figure 23-7 Climacticc F
Running the Link Budget Calculator 6. Located to the right of the green Coordinates button is a drop‐down list of Climactic C Factor values. It is only available if you choose a non‐adaptive rate. Figure 23‐7: Climactic C Factors For help about what these mean, click the ? button to the right of the list in Figure 23‐7. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐9...
Page 364: Figure 23-8 Climacticc Factor
Running the Link Budget Calculator Figure 23‐8: Climactic C Factor description In Figure 23‐9 we display a map of the world showing C Factor contours: Figure 23‐9: World map showing C Factor contours 7. Click Calculate to obtain the required performance estimate. Placing the cursor in any other calculated field will also update the calculated results. Note RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐10...
Page 365 Running the Link Budget Calculator Figure 23‐10: LBC ‐ Results section The Expected Performance parameters are calculated and displayed: • Expected RSS ‐ the expected RSS that the RADWIN Manager shows when the RADWIN 5000 HPMP ODUs are optimally aligned • Services Type ‐ Ethernet only • Ethernet Rate ‐ maximum throughput available for the chosen parameter combination • Antenna height for LOS – the minimum antenna height required for line‐of‐sight opera‐ tion. It is the sum of the height required for boresight clearance due to the earth’s cur‐ vature plus the height required to clear the Fresnel zone If the expected performance is not suitable for your application, try different parameters and repeat the calculation. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 23‐11...
Page 366: Chapter 24: Spectrum View
Chapter 24: Spectrum View What is Spectrum View The RADWIN Manager Spectrum View utility is an RF survey tool designed to support the sector installation prior to full sector service activation. The tool provides comprehensive and clear spectral measurement information enabling easier, faster and better quality installations. You can view real‐time spectrum information, save the spectral information and view retrieved spectral information from historic spectrum scans. Separate information is generated for the HBS and HSUs ‐ all by selection. A general sector level Highest Interference view is also provided. RADWIN’s spectrum measurement and estimation algorithms are designed to show accurate information accommodating variations in frequency, temperature and interference power and at the same time overcoming anomalies that tend to occur in high interference environments. Who needs it As indicated in the previous paragraph, Spectrum View is primarily a professional tool for the technician. The Spectrum View reports may be generated as images, CSV files or text files as part of the Get Diagnostics feature. All of these are intended for use by to RADWIN Customer Service to assist with diagnosing interference related problems. Scope of this Chapter In view of the nature of the intended audience, we assume that the reader knows about RF Spectrum Analysis. This chapter therefore, is not a tutorial on RF Spectrum Analysis and is restricted to showing how to use the Spectrum View tool without any further theoretical explanations. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐1...
Page 367: Two Ways To Run Spectrum View
Two Ways to Run Spectrum View Two Ways to Run Spectrum View Spectrum View may be run from the HBS in which case you have a choice of analyzing all sites in the sector in one run, or making a selection. Spectrum View may also be run on a managing computer directly connected to an HSU. Remember that in such a case the results will be quite different if the HSU is part of a sector (registered or not) or if it is completely stand‐alone, for example using a different spectral range and operating Band from the HBS. In the former case, expect a “noise hump” around the channels used by the sector, due to the duty signals from the HBS. Where is the Spectrum View Data stored Spectrum View data is always stored in the ODU originating the analysis. The HBS maintains the last Spectrum View analysis data for all members of the sector. If you run Spectrum View from a directly connected HSU, it stores its own data, which may be quite different from the analysis obtained for the same HSU from the HBS. Spectrum View Main Window: HBS In this section we review the main window management controls. Click the Spectrum View button . The Spectrum View main window opens in full screen mode: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐2...
Page 368 Spectrum View Main Window: HBS Use the top left panel to set the Spectrum View configuration parameters and choose an analysis type ‐ Entire Sector or Specific HSU. The settings are “sticky” for the HBS and will be reused. The analysis range is limited from 4900 to 6050 MHz with a maximum difference of 500MHz. Erroneous entries will be shown with a red border like this: The timeout is the maximum analysis time per site. Use the bottom button bar to start an analysis, to stop a running analysis or run a Highest Interference profile for the sector: If you choose to run the analysis for specific HSUs, The left hand HSU panel will change: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐3...
Page 369 Spectrum View Main Window: HBS Check the required HSUs and then Start. Since a large sector will clutter up the right hand display area, you may selectively Show, minimize or remove a sector member. Another way of freeing up more space for analysis displays is to hide the left hand panel using the circled arrow: If for example you click Show on the HBS, the following view will open in the right panel: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐4...
Page 370: Spectrum View Display Function Buttons
Spectrum View Display Function Buttons Figure 24‐1: Spectrum View data panel for the HBS, ready for data The standard X button closes the window completely (but does not loose data). The ‐ button collapses the view to look like this: The two side arrows (circled) are used to reorder a stack of such view on the display area: The remaining controls on the Spectrum View main window relate to Spectrum View data manipulation. We will cover them in the next section using a live analysis. Spectrum View Display Function Buttons Spectrum View data manipulation functions are provide on the top button bar: Each button function applies to all of the sector members at once. Note RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐5...
Page 371: Running Spectrum View From The Hbs
Running Spectrum View from the HBS Table 24‐1: Spectrum View Analysis Display Buttons functionality Butto Purpose Show/Hide Antenna A Show/Hide Antenna B Show/Hide average Show/Hide current channel (HSUs only) Show/Hide maximum Show/Hide DFS information Show/Hide point values Save the analysis to a CSV file Clear all sector member analyses from the display (They can be shown again) Running Spectrum View from the HBS Choose Entire sector and click Start. You are offered the following cautionary message: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐6...
Page 372: Figure 24-2 Spectrum Viewa
Running Spectrum View from the HBS If it is acceptable to drop the service click Yes. The processing may appear to have stopped ‐ but it is not complete until all of the Show buttons for selected HSUs are enabled. Here is the result for the HBS: The keys to the color coding is permanently displayed at the bottom of the main window: Figure 24‐2: Spectrum View Analysis color codes The green band reflects the current HBS operating frequency. Notice also the small fly‐over diskette icon (circled) to the upper left of either graph. Clicking it opens a Windows File‐Save dialog allowing you to save the graph to disk as a jpg file. Here is the analysis for one of the HSUs. It is a bit different: The light green rectangle in the background of both antenna displays reflects actual channel (20 MHz wide here) being used by the HSU. The title bar also contains the HSUs IP address. There is a further display of interest: Highest Interference for all HSUs in the sector: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐7...
Page 373: Running Spectrum View From A Hsu
Running Spectrum View from a HSU See Figure 24‐2 for the color coding. Running Spectrum View from a HSU There is no difference in principle between running a Spectrum View analysis for a HSU and running it for a HBS. There is a major difference between running Spectrum View on an active HSU (registered or not) or in total isolation from the sector. Here is what happens in total isolation: Figure 24‐3: HSU spectrum analysis in complete isolation from the sector Now we return the HSU to the sector: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐8...
Page 374: Zooming In And Out
Zooming in and out Figure 24‐4: HSU spectrum analysis within the sector The hump in Figure 24‐4 reflects the duty cycle signal from the HBS centered on the current channel (circled). Zooming in and out You may zoom in on a range of interest and enlarge it. Use the mouse to swipe the range from left to right or reverse and then click.The swiped range is zoomed in. You may repeat this several times. The zoom applies to all charts for all element in the analysis. An indicator is provided at the top right of each chart: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐9...
Page 375 Zooming in and out Zoom Out returns you to the previous zoom state; Show all reverts you to the original display. In a zoomed state, a horizontal scroll bar enables you to view other areas of the displayed frequency range. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 24‐10...
Page 376: Chapter 25: Using The Web Interface
Chapter 25: Using the Web Interface What is it For The Web Interface (WI) enables you to carry out basic sector management functions using a Web browser. It may be used to ‐ • Monitor a sector on a minimal basis • Check sector parameters and make limited changes • View the link Inventory • Inspect the Recent Events logs Who Needs it The WI is a tool for technicians to “quick‐install” a HSU in a link with minimum effort. It may also be employed by a user for a quick look at current operating parameters and the Recent Events logs. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐1...
Page 377: How It Works
IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 Sector ID EBGX20560334 Inherited by all communicating fixed HSUs. Network ID Inherited by all communicating nomadic Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 and v3 Contact Bach Optional HBS.01 Name Bach@HBS.01 Location of Contact ‐ optional Band 5.730 ‐ 5.845 GHz FCC/IC Inherited by all communicating HSUs Channel Bandwidth 20MHz Inherited by all communicating HSUs Unit Serial Number PET540E000A00000 Geographic location Latitude ‐37.8148 Longitude 144.9630 Azimuth (deg) Used for initial default placement of HSUs Beam width (deg) Antenna height (m) From RF plan, not used RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐2...
Page 378 10.104.50.2 IPv4 Net Mask 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway 10.104.10.21 All communicating HSUs and HBS in the same subnet Address 2005:104:50::2 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 Contact Mozart Optional HFU.01.02 Name Mozart@HFU.01.02 Location of Contact ‐ optional Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A000422 Geographic location Latitude ‐37.62400 Longitude 145.21484 Antenna height (m) From RF plan, not used RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐3...
Page 379 2005:104:20::21 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 HFU.01.04 Contact Handel Optional (Used only to illustrate AES Name Handel@HFU.01.04 Location of Contact ‐ optional 265) Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A0003B Supports AES 256 Geographic location Latitude ‐37.4018 Longitude 145.0086 Antenna height (m) From RF plan, not used Table 25‐3: Preconfigured setup ‐ Level allocation for maximum nomadic HSUs Time Sots Number of Level Remark nomadic HSUs Downlink Uplink Includes HNU.0.01 below RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐4...
Page 380: What It Provides
Address 2005:104:50::3 IPv6 Subnet Prefix Length Default Gateway 2005:104:20::21 HNU.01.01 Protocol SNMPv1 Can be set to SNMPv3 or both v1 Contact Brahms Optional Name Brahms@HNU.01.01 Location of Contact ‐ optional Downlink Time Slots May vary with context Uplink Unit Serial Number P07030E000A0003B On the managing computer, point your browser to10.104.50.200 and log on as shown below. You can also log on over the air to registered HSUs in the same way. For stand‐alone or unregistered HSUs, you must connect a managing computer directly to the HSU and again log on as shown below. What it Provides The WI is a developing technology. It is possible that the current distributed release may have additional or slightly different features from those shown here. The description below, should nevertheless give you a good idea of how to use the WI. Prerequisites Hardware You need a regular LAN connection between a managing computer and one of the sector ODUs. The WI can be used directly opposite the HBS any of its HSUs. It can also be used over the air from the HBS to any registered HSU. The WI is available for RADWIN 2000 C and RADWIN 2000 B ODUs at release level 2.6.00 or later along with RADWIN 5000 ODUs, from release 3.2.00 or later. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐5...
Page 381: Special Considerations Working With The Wi
Your computer should have at least version 6 of MS Internet Explorer. The Web interface also works with other browsers such as Mozilla Firefox version 3 and later. Technical Background You should be familiar with the concepts underlying the RADWIN Manager and preferably with the Manager itself. Special Considerations Working with the WI Advanced Configurations For setup configurations using features such as HSS, VLAN and QoS, you will need to use the RADWIN Manager. Operational Effects Several WI functions cause temporary sync loss. Typically, changing the number of antennas falls into this category. These cases will be pointed out in Warning messages. Some Working Tips You can: » Log on to a ODU on the default IP address of 10.0.0.120/8, set the Link ID and IP address instead of using the RADWIN Manager as in Chapter 6. Unlike the Local Con‐ nection method, you need to reset the ODU to see the change in the Web Interface. » Change the operating Band of an HSU instead of using the RADWIN Manager as in Chapter 8. You can revert it the same way or by a direct connection, logged on as Installer. You cannot change the operating Band of the HBS in this way. » Look at Recent Events for either site You cannot: » Change default Tx power » Configure Spatial Multiplexing/Diversity » Manage other features such as GSU (when supported), VLAN, QoS » Perform Software upgrade Be very careful: » Using this tool if your link is providing Customer Service which may not be interrupted with sync‐losses RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐6...
Page 382: Scope Of This Chapter
Scope of this Chapter Scope of this Chapter The remainder of this chapter is divided into three sections: Logging on, HBS Configuration and HSU Configuration. Logging on To use the Web interface, simply point your browser to the IP address of the site to which you are connected. Figure 25‐1: Web interface ‐ Log on The User Name and Password are respectively, admin and netman as used for Telnet access. You must click the Log In button to effect entry to the WI. The foregoing applies to both the HBS and the HSUs. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐7...
Page 383: Hbs Management
HBS Management HBS Management The Main Window Figure 25‐2: Web interface ‐ Main window, HBS The Sector ID (EBGX20560334) appears all or in part as the heading. The HBS Info panel is self explanatory. The green Active indicator will vary according to the status of the HSU shown by the RADWIN Manager. Figure 25‐3: Sector Status panel (it will typically be Active, Inactive, Probing etc.) The bottom panel shows all member HSUs. The green LED icons will change color to reflect the status of HSUs. For example, deregistering an HSU will change it to black as in the RADWIN Manager. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐8...
Page 384 Configure Figure 25‐4: HSU Haydn deregistered Now, click anywhere on the HBS Info panel: Configure The Configure button opens the following display: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐9...
Page 385 Configure System The Name, Contact and Location field may be changed. Clicking Save commits them. Clicking Refresh reverts the fields to their last Saved values. Air Interface There is nothing that can be changed on this panel. Clicking the Antenna & Tx Power button opens up the following window: The only item that can be changed is the Antenna Type: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐10...
Page 386 Configure Changing Antenna Type will call a sector‐wide sync loss. Caution Inventory The Inventory display is for information only. Management The Management fields are all fully editable: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐11...
Page 387 Configure If you change any of these fields, you will cause a HBS reset: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐12...
Page 388 Configure Other You may change the HBS LAN port configuration: You will receive the following notification: This action of course, has no bearing on the sector. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐13...
Page 389: Hsu Management
Events Events The Recent Event List is displayed: Reset Use this button to reset the HBS. HSU Management HSU management follows the same pattern as that for the HBS. To avoid tedious repetition, We will only point out significant differences. The Main Window HSU configuration is accomplished by clicking the required HSU in the bottom panel of Chapter 25. For the purposes of this section, we have deregistered Haydn so the panel looks like this: Click Mozart. Here is what you see: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐14...
Page 390 The Main Window Clicking Configure, opens up a new tab in you browser, pointing to Mozart: Here is the HSU main window: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐15...
Page 391 The Main Window The only item here requiring comment is the Configure button. Install is disabled and the remaining three buttons are the same as for the HBS. Here is the Configure display: The only function here, which differs from the corresponding HBS function, is the Air Interface tab. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐16...
Page 392 The Main Window In addition to the Antenna & Tx Power button, you may also change operating Band: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐17...
Page 393 The Main Window There are two strict caveats to using this function: • It is intended as a tool for the field technician, replacing an HSU in the field. • If you change the operating Band of a registered HSU, you will “loose” it from the sector. The only remedy is to log on to the HSU with a Warning direct connection and either reverse the above process, or log on as Installer and using the regular Change Band. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐18...
Page 394: Web Interface For Vmus
WEB Interface for VMUs WEB Interface for VMUs The VMU has GPS support that is reflected in its WI page: Notice the current position of the VMU in the lower part of the panel. Using the Map View tab opens a Google Earth picture centered on the current location: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐19...
Page 395 WEB Interface for VMUs The current position is marked with the icon. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 25‐20...
Page 396: Part 7: Product Reference
Part 7: Product Reference Release 3.5.70...
Page 397: Appendix A: Technical Specifications
Appendix A: Technical Specifications Scope of these Specifications This appendix contains technical specifications for the major link components appearing in this User Manual. They are correct at the date of publication, but are intended for general background only. The latest authoritative and most up to date technical specifications are available as Data Sheets obtainable from RADWIN Customer Service. In any event, RADWIN reserves the right to change these specifications without notice. ODU ‐ HBS and HSU/HMU Configuration ODU: Outdoor Unit with Integrated Antenna, Connectorized for External Antenna or Embedded Architecture Uses RADWIN PoE type device for Ethernet only HBS: • Outdoor RADWIN CAT‐5e cable. maximum cable length: 100m for 10/100BaseT. • Outdoor RADWIN CAT‐5e cable. maximum cable ODU to PoE Interface length: 75m for 1000BaseT. HSU: Outdoor CAT‐5e cable; maximum cable length: 100 m (10/ 100BaseT) Radio HBS: Up to 250Mbps aggregate net throughput depending on model and regulation Capacity HSU: Up to 50 Mbps aggregate net throughput depending on model and regulation Up to 32 HSUs per HBS (varies with HBS model) HSU support Up to 40 km / 25 miles Coverage RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐1...
Page 398 Supported Packet classification to 4 queues according to 802.1p and Diffserv Supported 802.1Q, 802.1P, QinQ VLAN Supported using HSS TDD Intrasite Synchronization Supported through common GPS receiver per site TDD Inter Site Synchronization Duplex Technology FEC k = 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 Error Correction Rate – Dual Antenna [Mbps] at 20 MHz CBW Rate – Single Antenna [Mbps] at 19.5 58.5 10 MHz CBW Modulation BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM FEC [k=] Max Tx Power [dBm] for 4.8 – 6 Sensitivity (dBm) @BER <10e‐9 at ‐88 ‐86 ‐83 ‐81 ‐77 ‐72 ‐70 ‐67 20 MHz CBW For 10 MHz CBW, deduct 3 dBm AES 128; AES 256 available by upgrade license. Encryption RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐2...
Page 399 ODU ‐ HBS and HSU/HMU Supported Bands The bands shown below are supported by RADWIN products. Both the bands and related Channel Bandwidths are product dependent. Occupied Band CBW Regulation Frequency R ange DFS? Compliance (Notes) (MHz) (GHz) (GHz) 2.3045‐2.4745 5 2.302‐2.477 N/A (Supported CBW product dependent) Universal 2.297‐2.482 2.287‐2.492 2.4095‐2.4645 5 2.407‐2.467 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart C and IC RSS‐ FCC/IC 2.402‐2.472 2.392‐2.482 2.4095‐2.4745 5 2.407‐2.477 ETSI EN 300 328 (Supported CBW product ETSI dependent) 2.402‐2.482 2.392‐2.492 3.4105‐3.4825 5...
Page 400 4.9425‐4.9875 5 FCC 47CFR, Part 90, Subpart Y and IC RSS‐ 4.940‐4.990 FCC/IC 4.940‐4.990 4.8975‐5.0025 5 4.895‐5.005 Universal 4.890‐5.010 4.880‐5.020 4.9975‐5.1525 5 4.995‐5.155 Universal 4.990‐5.160 4.980‐5.170 5.150 ‐ 5.350 ETSI EN 301 893 v1.7.1 ETSI 5.150 ‐ 5.350 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart E UNII New 5.150 ‐ 5.250 Rules 5.1475‐5.3375 5 5.145‐5.340 Universal 5.140‐5.345 5.130‐5.355 5.2525‐5.3475 5 5.255‐5.345 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart E and IC RSS‐ FCC/IC 5.255‐5.345 5.255‐5.345 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐4...
Page 401 5.725 – 5.875 5.7275‐5.8475 5 5.725‐5.850 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart C and IC RSS‐ FCC/IC 5.725‐5.850 5.725‐5.850 5.7375‐5.8375 5 5.8 5.735‐5.840 MII China (Supported CBW product MII China dependent) 5.730‐5.845 5.720‐5.855 5.8325‐5.8675 5 5.830‐5.870 GSR‐38 (Supported CBW product WPC India dependent) 5.825‐5.875 5.815‐5.885 5.7275‐5.9525 5 5.725‐5.955 Universal 5.720‐5.960 5.710‐5.970 5.6975‐6.0525 5 5.695‐6.055 Universal 5.690‐6.060 5.680‐6.070 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐5...
Page 402 Frequency Bandwidth Power Step Mode 3.403‐3.490 3.413‐3.480 3.470‐3.610 3.480‐3.600 Inactive 5, 10, 20 23(†) 3.590‐3.710 3.600‐3.700 25(‡) (†) The 3.480 GHz frequency is overlapped, occurring in two diﬀerent bands as shown. If you wish to use the 3.480 GHz frequency, you should set Max TX Power to 17 dBm. (‡) The 3.600 GHz frequency is overlapped, occurring in two diﬀerent bands Note as shown. If you wish to use the 3.600 GHz frequency, you should set Max TX Power to 23 dBm. Management Management Application (per RADWIN Manager sector) SNMP and Telnet Protocol RADWIN NMS ‐ RNMS Environmental HBS/HSU: ‐35°C to +60°C / ‐31°F to +140°F Operating Temperatures HBS/HSU: Up to 100% non‐condensing, IP67 Humidity ‐40° to 85°C / ‐40°F to 185°F Storage RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐6...
Page 403: Hsu With Ac Power Feeding
HSU with AC Power Feeding Mechanical 37.1/14.84(W) x 37.1/14.84(H) x 9.00/3.6(D) cm/in; 3.5 kg HBS with Integrated Antenna / 7 lbs 19.5/7.7(W) x 27.0/10.8(H) x 5.5/2.2(D) cm/in; 1.8 kg / 3.6 HBS/HSU Connectorized 19.5/7.7(W) x 27.0/10.8(H) x 7/2.8(D) cm/in; 1.8 kg / 3.6 HSU SFF with Embedded antenna) 19.5/7.7(W) x 27.0/10.8(H) x 5.5/2.2(D) cm/in; 1.1 kg / 2.4 RADWIN 5505 HSUConnectorized RADWIN 5505 HSUwith Integrated 24.1/9.4(W) x 19.7/7.7(H) x 7.7/3(D) cm/in; 1.3 kg / 2.8 lbs Antenna, also HSU AC Power Power provided over ODU‐IDU cable using PoE Power Feeding HBS: <25W, HSU: <20W, HSU‐505/510/525<10W Power Consumption ‐ alone Safety UL 60950‐1, UL 60950‐22, CAN/CSA C22.2 60950‐1, CAN/ CSA C22.2 60950‐22 EN/IEC 60950‐1, EN/IEC 60950‐22 ETSI/IEC 47CFR Class B, Part15, Subpart B EN 300 386, EN 301 489‐1, EN 301 489‐4 ETSI CISPR 22 Class B CAN/CSA‐CEI/IEC CISPR 22 Class B AS/NZS HSU with AC Power Feeding Configuration ODU: Outdoor Unit with Integrated Antenna Architecture Outdoor RADWIN CAT‐5e cable. Maximum cable length: ODU to LAN and PoE Interface 100m for 10/100BaseT. Radio 10 Mbps net aggregate throughput Capacity Up to 40 km / 25 miles...
Page 404 Error Correction AES 128 Encryption 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface 10/100BaseT, IEEE 802.3af PoE port Layer 2 Hub Mode Packet classification to 4 queues according to 802.1p and Diffserv, Dynamic scheduling according to air interface changes Supported 802.1Q, 8021.P, QinQ VLAN Mechanical 24.1(w) x 19.7(h) x 7.7(d) cm Dimensions 1.3 kg / 2.8 lbs Weight 19.7/7.7(W) x 24.1/9.5(H) x 9.0/3.6(D) cm/in; 1.3 kg / 2.8 Integrated Antenna Power Direct AC power feeding 85‐265VAC Power Feeding <10W Power Consumption ‐ alone Environmental ‐35°C to +60°C / ‐31°F to +140°F Operating Temperatures 100% condensing, IP67 (totally protected against dust and Humidity against immersion up to 1m) Safety UL 60950‐1, UL 60950‐22, CAN/CSA C22.2 60950‐1, CAN/ CSA C22.2 60950‐22 EN/IEC 60950‐1, EN/IEC 60950‐22 ETSI/IEC RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐8...
Page 405: Vmu
FEC k = 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 Error Correction Configurable: Symmetric or Asymmetric Bandwidth allocation Supported Adaptive Modulation & Coding Supported Automatic Channel Selection Supported Diversity Supported Spectrum Viewer 25 dBm Max Tx Power Duplex Technology AES 128; FIPS 197 Encryption WiFi Access Point Radio 2.4 GHz; IEEE 802.11b/g/n Frequency Band 2x2 MIMO‐OFDM (BPSK/QPSK/16QAM/64QAM) Modulation Configurable: 20 or 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth 26 dBm Max Tx Power WEP, WPA‐PSK, WPA‐TKIP, WPA2 AES, RADIUS Encryption Up to 8 BSSIDs Virtual AP Up to 256 Concurrent Clients 2.4 GHz; IEEE 802.11b/g/n Frequency Band Autonomous GPS with 1 external antenna, supporting Type NMEA, TAIP RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐9...
Page 406 Interfaces Auto‐sensing 10/100BaseT; M12 Connector Auto‐sensing 10/100BaseT + PoE‐out 802.3af; M12 POE‐out Connector 2 alarm‐input; 2 relay‐output; M12 Connector Alarms Networking Bridge Mode Layer 2 Packet classification to 4 priority queues according to 802.1p or Diffserv 802.1Q, 802.1P, QinQ, 4094 VLANS VLAN Management RADWIN Manager or Web based management Management Application SNMPv1, SNMPv3, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS Protocol RADWIN Network Management System (RNMS) NMS Application Electrical 28 VDC (10‐36 V) 6A Voltage Input Range <25 Watt (max) Power Dissipation Detects ignition on/off status and delays power off Power Ignition Control automatically RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐10...
Page 407: Idu-H (Aggregation Unit
5.9 GHz Universal 5.4725‐5.7225 5.470‐5.725 5.465‐5.730 5.455‐5.740 Universal 5.4 GHz Universal 5.1475‐5.3375 5.145‐5.340 5.140‐5.345 5.130‐5.355 Universal 5.3 GHz Universal 4.9975‐5.1525 4.995‐5.155 4.990‐5.160 4.980‐5.170 Universal 5.0 GHz Universal 4.8975‐4.9925 4.895‐4.995 4.890‐5.000 4.880‐5.00GHz Universal 4.9 GHz Universal IDU‐H (Aggregation Unit) Ethernet Interface 6 x legacy mode PoE ports(10/100/1000Mbps), up to PoE Interfaces 25W per port 2 x RJ‐45 PHY ports of 10/100/1000 Mbps Based‐T Ethernet Ports Ethernet IEEE 802.3/U LAN Interface Framing/Coding 100Ω LAN Interface Line Impedance RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐11...
Page 408 2048 bytes Maximal Frame Size 3 ms Ethernet Latency Mechanical 1U 19” Rack mounted, half width Dimensions 0.8Kg Weight Power < 15W @ Maximal Power feeding Internal Power Consumption 44VDC ‐ 56VDC, Dual redundant inputs. 3 pin female DC Power Feeding connector Front panel grounding lug Grounding ‐ DC input Line & Reverse Polarity protection Protection ‐ PoE Ports over/under Current & over/under Voltage protections Environmental ‐40°C to 55°C / ‐40°F to 131°F Operating Temperatures 90% non‐condensing Humidity ‐40° to 70°C / ‐40°F to 158°F Humidity 95% Storage Safety UL60950‐1, CAN/CSA‐C22.2 No. 60950‐1 ETSI/IEC EN/IEC 60950‐1 47CFR Part 15, Subpart B, Class B EN 300 386; 301 489‐4; 301 489‐1 ETSI CISPR 22 Class B CAN/CSA‐ AS/NZS RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐12...
Page 409: Gbe Poe Device - Indoor, Ac
• Auto recovery Protection • Over voltage protection Green led for normal operation Indication Interfaces RJ‐45 connector PoE output Outdoor CAT 5e; Maximum cable length: 75m for PoE to ODU Interface 1000BaseT or 100m for 10/100BaseT. RJ‐45 connector Ethernet input Standard socket IEC320 C14 type AC input on device AC cable Variety of AC plugs available (see below) RADWIN RJ‐45 connector Ethernet / ODU RJ-45, 10/100/1000BaseT Interface (Line Ethernet LAN interface type Impedance -100) Mechanical Plastic Case 16cm(W) x 6.3cm(D) x 3.33cm(H) Dimensions 250g Weight Environmental 0°C to 40°C/32°F to 104°F Operating Temperatures 90% non‐condensing Humidity RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual...
Page 410: Poe Device - Outdoor, Dc
61000-4‐3 61000-4‐4 61000-4‐5 Surge 61000-4‐6 61000-4‐11 DIPS FCC part 15 class B, CISPR Pub 22 class B, AS/NZS CISPR 22 class B PoE Device ‐ Outdoor, DC Electrical ‐20 to ‐60 VDC (single input) Input voltage range 48VDC / 0.6A Output voltage 0.5W (not including radio) Power Consumption Differential ‐ 15KW Protections Common – 3KW Interfaces Ethernet LAN interface type RJ‐45, 10/100BaseT Interface (Line Impedance ‐100W) 2 pins connector DC input RJ‐45 ODU (PoE Port) Mechanical All weather cases Enclosure 24.5cm(H) x 13.5cm(W) x 4.0cm(D) Dimensions 1.0kg/2.2lbs Weight Environmental ‐35° C to 60° C / ‐31° F to 140° F Operating Temperatures RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐14...
Page 411: Gsu
Designed to meet EN 300 386; EN 301 489‐1 ETSI Designed to meet 47CFR Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Designed to meet ICES‐003 Class B CAN/CSA Designed to meet CISPR 22 class B AS/NZS Configuration Outdoor Synchronization Unit; including External GPS Antenna and RF cable. (PoE device should be ordered Architecture separately) Outdoor CAT‐5e cable; maximum cable length: 100 m GSU to PoE Interface Mechanical 21(w) x 17(h) x 7(d) cm Dimensions 1.2 kg / 2.65 lbs Weight Power Power provided by PoE device Power Feeding <10Watt Max Power Dissipation Environmental ‐40°C to 60°C / ‐40°F to 140°F (Up to 70°C/158°F for Operating Temperature Range limited time or under forced convection) Up to 100% non‐condensing, IP67 (totally protected Humidity against dust and against immersion up to 1m) Safety UL 60950‐1, UL 60950‐22, CAN/CSA C22.2 60950‐1, CAN/ FCC/IC (cTUVus) CSA C22.2 60950‐22 EN/IEC 60950‐1, EN/IEC 60950‐22 ETSI RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐15...
Page 412: Lightning Protector
60 VDC ‐ 650 mA Maximum Operational Voltage 1 A Maximum Continuous current 90 to 110 Ohm Impedance RJ45 CAT 5e STP (shielded) Connection type 8 wires + shielding Pin-out All pins protected Pins Protected <5 microseconds (with ODU) Response time Nominal discharge currents 500 A @ 8/20μs Line to Line 2000 A @ 8/20μs Line to Ground Impulse Discharge Current 1 operation minimum 20000 A, 8/20 μs > 10 operations 10000 A, 8/20 μs 1 operation 2000 A, 10/350 μs > 300 operations 200 A, 10/1000 μs > 500 operations 200 A, 10/700 μs Impulse Spark‐over 150 V DC Spark-over ±20 % @ 100 V/s 350 V 100 V/μs 500 V 1000 V/μs RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐16...
Page 413: Fast Ethernet Cat-5E Cable Repeater
Weight Environmental ‐40°C to 60°C Operating temperature ‐50°C to 70°C Storage temperature IP67 Enclosure rating 100% non condensing Humidity Fast Ethernet CAT‐5e cable repeater Electrical 100BaseT Compatible Interfaces Up to 1000Mbps Data Rates 48 VDC Nominal Operational Voltage Maximum Operational Voltage 60 VDC ‐ 650 mA Current consumption 0.5 A 90 to 110 Ohm Impedance RJ45 CAT 5e STP (shielded) Connection type 8 wires + shielding Pin-out Mechanical Metal Enclosure Screw Connection to bonding Network 150mm Dimensions 220 gram (0.22Kg) Weight RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐17...
Page 414: Antenna Characteristics
Antenna Characteristics Environmental ‐40°C to 60°C Operating temperature Storage temperature ‐50°C to 70°C IP67 Enclosure rating 100% non condensing Humidity Safety UL 60950‐1, UL 60950‐22, CAN/CSA C22.2 60950‐1, CAN/ CSA C22.2 60950‐22 EN/IEC 60950‐1, EN/IEC 60950‐22 ETSI/IEC CFR47 Class B, Part 15, Subpart B EN 300 386, EN 301 489‐4, EN 301 489‐1 ETSI CISPR 22 Class B CAN/CSA‐AS/NZS Antenna Characteristics An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio signal, in the form of RF power, is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa. The transmission range is a function of the antenna gain and transmitting power. These factors are limited by country regulations. The RADWIN 5000 HPMP may be operated with an integrated antenna attached to the ODU unit, or with an external antenna wired to the ODU via N‐type connectors. All cables and connections must be connected correctly to reduce losses. The required antenna impedance is 50Ω. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 A‐18...
Page 415: Odu‐Poe Cable (Hbs And Hsu)
The ODU‐PoE cable is shielded/outdoor class CAT‐5e, 4 twisted‐pair 24 AWG terminated with RJ‐45 connectors on both ends. A cable gland on the ODU side provides hermetic sealing. The following table shows the connector pinout: Table B‐1: ODU‐PoE RJ‐45 Connector Pinout Function Color White/Green Rx N Green Rx T Tx T White/Orange Orange Tx N Blue 4 Power (+) White/Blue Power (+) White/Brown Power () Brown Power () Table B‐2: LAN‐GbE PoE RJ‐45 Connector Pinout Function Color White/Green TxRx A Green TxRx A White/Orange TxRx B Orange TxRx B Blue 4 TxRx C & Power(+) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 B‐1...
Page 416: Hbs/Hss Unit Connection Pinout
HBS/HSS Unit Connection Pinout Table B‐2: LAN‐GbE PoE RJ‐45 Connector Pinout (Continued) Function Color TxRx C & Power(+) White/Blue White/Brown TxRx D & Power(‐) Brown TxRx D & Power(‐) HBS/HSS Unit Connection Pinout Table B‐3: HBS/HSS Unit Connection Pinout ODU HSS UNIT Color RJ‐45 RJ‐45 White/Green 1 Green Not connected White/Orange Orange 6 Blue 4 White/Blue 5 White/Brown 7 Brown 8 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 B‐2...
Page 417: User Port Connectors
User Port Connectors User Port Connectors LAN Port The LAN 10/100BaseT interface terminates in an 8‐pin RJ‐45 connector, wired in accordance to Table B‐4. Table B‐4: Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout Function Signal Pin Transmit Data (positive) TD (+) Transmit Data (negative) TD (–) Receive Data (positive) RD (+) Receive Data (negative) RD (–) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 B‐3...
Page 418: Dc Power Terminals
DC Power Terminals DC Power Terminals DC PoE Table B‐5: Terminal Block 2‐pin ‐48VDC Function Right Left – VMU Connectors Power Connector All wiring should be at least 20 AWG. Table B‐6: Power connector ‐ front view and pinout Connector Function Wire Color Pin VMINU Black VPLUS VPLUS VMINU Black IGNITION Yellow RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 B‐4...
Page 419 Function Color MJ12 CAT 5e White/Green Green Tx‐ White/Orange Orange Rx‐ White/Brown 7 Brown White/Blue Blue Dry Contact Alarm Connector Table B‐8: Alarm Connector Pinout Connector Function Color MJ12 White/Green ALRM_NO_OUT2 Green ALRM_NO_OUT1 White/Orange ALRM_IN_COMMON Orange ALRM_IN1 White/Brown ALRM_NC_OUT2 Brown ALRM_NC_OUT1 ALRM_OUT_COMMON White/Blue Blue ALRM_IN2 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 B‐5...
Page 420: Appendix C: Mib Reference
Appendix C: MIB Reference Introduction About the MIB The RADWIN MIB is a set of APIs that enables external applications to control RADWIN equipment. The MIB is divided into public and a private API groups: • Public: RFC‐1213 (MIB II) variables, RFC‐1214 (MIB II) System and Interfaces sections • Private: Controlled by RADWIN and supplements the public group. This appendix describes the public and private MIB used by RADWIN. Terminology The following terms are used in this appendix. Term Meaning Management Information Base Application Programming Interface SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol In addition, the MIB uses internally, the older notions of Local site and Remote site where this manual would use site A and site B. To avoid burdening the reader, this appendix will follow the MIB usage. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐1...
Page 421: Interface Api
Interface API Interface API Control Method The RADWIN Manager application provides all the means to configure and monitor a RADWIN 5000 HPMP link, communicating with the SNMP agent in each ODU. Each SNMP agent contains data on each of the PoEs and ODUs in the link. Both agents communicate with each other over the air using a proprietary protocol. Each ODU has a single MAC address and a single IP address. Note To control and configure the device using the MIB, you should adhere to the following rules: • The connection for control and configuration is to the local site, over any SNMP/UDP/IP network. • All Parameters should be consistent between both of the ODUs. Note that inconsistency of air parameters can break the air connection. To correct air parameters inconsistency you must reconfigure each of the ODUs. • Common practice is to configure the remote site first and then to configure the local site. • For some of the configuration parameters additional action must be taken before the new value is loaded. Please refer to the operation in the parameters description. • Some of the MIB parameters values are product dependent. It is strongly recommend using the RADWIN Manager Application for changing these values. Setting wrong values may cause indeterminate results. Community String To control a link, all SNMP requests should go to the local site IP address. See Table 5‐6 for default Community strings. Private MIB Structure The sections in the private RADWIN MIB and its location in the MIB tree are shown in Figure C‐1 below: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐2...
Page 422: Mib Parameters
MIB Parameters Figure C‐1: Top Level Sections of the private MIB The products MIB section contains the definition of the Object IDs for the two form factors of the ODUs, Integrated Antenna and Connectorized (referred in the MIB as external antenna) and GSU (where applicable): Figure C‐2: Product MIB The GpsSynchronizerFamily MIB defines the GSU. The general MIB include a single generic parameter that is used by all traps as a trap description parameter. MIB Parameters The following section describes all of the MIB parameters. The MIB parameters follow the following naming convention: RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐3...
Page 423 .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7 Integer The desired state of the interface. The testing(3) state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. ifOperStatus .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8 Integer The current operational state of the interface. The testing(3) state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. ifInOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.x Counter The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. ifInUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.x Counter The number of subnetwork‐unicast packets delivered to a higher‐layer protocol. ifInNUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.x Counter The number of non‐unicast (i.e., subnetwork‐ broadcast or subnetwork‐ multicast) packets delivered to a higher‐ layer protocol. ifInErrors .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.x Counter The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher‐layer protocol. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐4...
Page 424 MIB Parameters Table C‐1: Supported Variables Name Type Description ifOutOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.x Counter The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. ifOutUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.x Counter The total number of packets that higher‐ level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork‐unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent. ifOutNUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18.x Counter The total number of packets that higher‐ level protocols requested be transmitted to a non‐ unicast (i.e., a subnetwork‐ broadcast or subnetwork‐multicast) address, including those that were discarded or not sent. a. x is the interface ID RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐5...
Page 425 RW Security model used for this trap generation. Model 2.1.4 winlink1000OduAdmHostsUserNam 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RW User name used to generate the snmpv3 trap. 2.1.5 winlink1000OduAdmHostsPasswor 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RW Password used to generate the snmpv3 trap. 2.1.6 winlink1000OduAdmHostsIPv6 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RW Trap destination IPv6 address. A change is 2.1.7 effective immediately. winlink1000OduBuzzerAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 Integer RW This parameter controls the activation of the buzzer while the unit is in install mode. A change is effective immediately. The valid values are: disabled (0) enabledAuto (1) enabledConstantly(2) advancedAuto (3). winlink1000OduProductId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐6...
Page 426 <IP_Address>|<Subnet_Mask>|<Default_Gatew ay>| winlink1000OduAdmVlanID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 Integer RW VLAN ID. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. winlink1000OduAdmVlanPriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 Integer RW VLAN Priority. 0 is lowest priority 7 is highest priority. winlink1000OduAdmSN 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 DisplayString ODU Serial Number winlink1000OduAdmProductName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString This is the product name as it exists at EC winlink1000OduAdmActivationKey 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString RW Activates a general key. winlink1000OduAdmRmtPermitted 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString RW Mobile Application: permitted partner OduType. OduType winlink1000OduAdmCpuID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 Integer CPU ID RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐7...
Page 427 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.3 Integer Bridging Mode. Valid values are: disabled (0) enabled (1). winlink1000OduSrvRingLinkMode RW Mode of the link regarding ring topology. winlink1000OduSrvRingTopologySu Ring Topology options are: supported not pported supported winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdTable N/A Ring VLAN IDs table. winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdEntry N/A VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. INDEX { winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex } winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex Index of VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanId RW VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. winlink1000OduSrvRingEthStatus Represents the Ethernet service blocking state of a Rings link winlink1000OduSrvRingMaxAllowe RW Defines the minimal time (in ms) required for dTimeFromLastRpm determination of ring failure. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐8...
Page 428 Configurations. winlink1000OduServiceVlanProvide 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.6. DisplayString Holds the possible Provider TPIDs. rListTPIDstr winlink1000OduEthernetRemaining 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.1 Integer Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps. Rate winlink1000OduEthernetIfTable N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table. winlink1000OduEthernetIfEntry N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex } winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. Integer ODU Ethernet Interface Index. winlink1000OduEthernetIfAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. DisplayString ODU MAC address. winlink1000OduEthernetIfAdminSt 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. Integer RW Required state of the interface. atus winlink1000OduEthernetIfOperStat 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. Integer Current operational state of the interface. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐9...
Page 429 Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively. winlink1000OduAirSSID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. The Sector ID in Point‐To‐ Multi‐Point systems. winlink1000OduAirTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RW Required Transmit power in dBm . This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. The min and max values are product specific. A change is effective immediately. winlink1000OduAirSesState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Current Link State. The value is active (3) during normal operation. winlink1000OduAirMstrSlv 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer This parameter indicates if the device was automatically selected into the radio link master or slave. The value is undefined if there is no link. The value is relevant only for point to point systems. winlink1000OduAirResync 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.8 Integer RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to restart the synchronization process. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐10...
Page 430 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.1 Integer Number of channels that can be used. nels winlink1000OduAirChannelsTable N/A Table of channels used by automatic channels selection (ACS). winlink1000OduAirChannelsEntry N/A ACS channels table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex } winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex Channel Index. winlink1000OduAirChannelsFreque Channel frequency in MHz. winlink1000OduAirChannelsOperSt RW Channel state. Can be set by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. A change is effective after link re‐synchronization. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). Rewriteable only in Point‐To‐Point products. winlink1000OduAirChannelsAvail Channel state. Product specific and cannot be changed by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). winlink1000OduAirChannelsDefault Default channel's availability for all CBWs. The Freq valid values are: forbidden (0) available (1). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐11...
Page 431 Integer Maximal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM RatioForSupporting 5.1.6 and still enable proper operation of the aforementioned CBW. winlink1000OduAirRFD 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer Current radio frame duration in microseconds. winlink1000OduAirRatesTable N/A Air Rate indexes table for current channel bandwidth. winlink1000OduAirRatesEntry N/A Air Rate indexes table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex } winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex Air Rate index. winlink1000OduAirRatesAvail Air Rate availability depending on air interface conditions. winlink1000OduAirDesiredRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer RW Required Air Rate index. 0 reserved for Adaptive Rate. A change is effective immediately after Set operation to the master side while the link is up. winlink1000OduAirLinkDistance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer Link distance in meters. A value of ‐1 indicates an illegal value and is also used when a link is not established. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐12...
Page 432 Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service elBW10MHz 0.7.1.4 under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChan 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of TDM service nelBW10MHz 0.7.1.5 under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service elBW20MHz 0.7.1.6 under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChan 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of TDM service nelBW20MHz 0.7.1.7 under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service elBW40MHz 0.7.1.8 under Channel BW of 40MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐13...
Page 433 Integer Number OF Discovered ODUs in network. scoveredODUs 0.25 winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverTabl N/A HSS Discover Table. winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverEntr N/A ODU Discover Table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverIndex } winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverInde HSS Discover Table Index. winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverODU Hold ODU HSS status in compress format: Description Domain IP HSS Role Hss support Enabled HSS protocol Sync Status Location IPv6. winlink1000OduAirHssMasterSlave 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer EHSM version compatibility. Relevant to Compatibility 0.27 Ethernet HSS Clients only. winlink1000OduAirHssNumberOfAs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Number of associated Ethernet HSS Clients. sociatedCU 0.28 Relevant to Ethernet HSS Masters only winlink1000OduAirHssAssociatedC N/A Associated Ethernet HSS Clients Table. Releant UTable for Ethernet HSS Masters only. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐14...
Page 434 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. winlink1000OduAirMaxEIRP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in 0.1 dBm resolution. winlink1000OduAirAntennaGainCo 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Antenna Gain Configurability options are nfigSupport product specific: supported not supported. winlink1000OduAirAntennaType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RW External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar. winlink1000OduAirRssBalance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RSS balance. Relation between RSS in radio 1 and RSS in radio 2. ‐2 : Radio 2 RSS is much stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐1 : Radio 2 RSS is stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐0 : Radio 2 RSS is equal to Radio 1 RSS. 1 : Radio 1 RSS is stronger than Radio 2 RSS. 2 : Radio 1 RSS is much stronger than Radio 2 RSS. winlink1000OduAirTotalTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Total Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal value While the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐15...
Page 435 FrequencyResolution 3.1.1.17 winlink1000OduAirComboSubBand 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 DisplayString Reflects the default channel list vector. DefaultChannelList 3.1.1.18 winlink1000OduAirComboSubBand 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Reflects the sub‐band DFS state. DfsState 3.1.1.19 winlink1000OduAirComboNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Represents the number of Multi‐band sub OfSubBands bands. winlink1000OduAirComboSwitchSu 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 DisplayString RW Switch sub band operation with a given sub bBand band ID. The get operation retrieves the current sub band ID. winlink1000OduAirComboCurrentS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 DisplayString Current Sub Band description. ubBandDesc winlink1000OduAirInternalMaxRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Max Ethernet throughput of the site (in Kpbs). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐16...
Page 436 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 TimeTicks Last CAC performed timestamp in hundredths elLastCACTimestamp 6.5.1.12 of a second since device up time. If no CAC has performed on the channel the return value will be 0. winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Was Radar detected on the channel. elRadarDetected 6.5.1.13 winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 TimeTicks Last Radar Detection timestamp in hundredths elRadarDetectionTimestamp 6.5.1.14 of a second since device up time. If no Radar has detected on the channel the return value will be 0. winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Was Radar detected on the channel. elAvailable 6.5.1.15 winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer The max RSS value of a received beacon on the elMaxBeaconRss 6.5.1.16 specific channel in dBm. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐17...
Page 437 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 DisplayString A string representing the channels available. FreqStr Each character represents one frequency when '1' means its available and '0' means its not. winlink1000OduAirAntConnectionT 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer RW Antenna connection type (External(1) Integrated(2) Embedded_External(3) Embedded_Integrated(4) EmbeddedBSA(5)). winlink1000OduAirAllowableChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 DisplayString RW A string representing the allowable channels. elsStr Each character represents one channel when '1' means its available and '0' means its not. winlink1000OduAirDfsAlgorithmTyp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer RW Bitmap for state of Radar Algorithm Type. Filters eState by bit's position: 0 = Zero PW 1 = Fixed 2 = Variable 3 = Staggered 4 = Long. winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetected N/A Last detected radars table. winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetected N/A ODU Multi‐band Sub Bands Table entry. INDEX Entry { winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedIndex } RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐18...
Page 438 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1. Gauge Current number of Background Block Errors starting from the present 15 minutes period. winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrIntegri 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1. Integer Indicates the integrity of the entry. winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrComp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1. OctetString Holds a compressed string of all data per ressed interface. Compressed Air Interface Structure (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) MinRSL (1) MaxRSL (1) RSLThresh1Exceeded (4) RSLThresh2Exceeded (4) MinTSL (1) MaxTSL (1) TSLThresh1Exceed (4) BBERThresh1Exceed (4) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) Compressed Etherent ODU interface (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) ActiveSeconds (4) winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalTa N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the last day (in resolution of 15 min intervals). winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalEn N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX {ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx } winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐19...
Page 439 Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours. winlink1000OduPerfMonDayBBE Current number of Background Block Errors per interval of 24 hours. winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIntegri Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24 hours. winlink1000OduPerfMonDayCompr Holds a compressed string of all data per essed interface. Compressed Air Interface Structure (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) MinRSL (1) MaxRSL (1) RSLThresh1Exceeded (4) RSLThresh2Exceeded (4) MinTSL (1) MaxTSL (1) TSLThresh1Exceed (4) BBERThresh1Exceed (4) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) Compressed Etherent ODU interface (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) ActiveSeconds (1) winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTab N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the current 15 min interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrEnt N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. INDEX {ifIndex } winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMi Current Min Received Level Reference starting nRSL from the present 15 minutes period. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐20...
Page 440 Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval. MinTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirInterval Current Max Transmit Signal Level per interval. MaxTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirInterval Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level TSLThresh1Exceed exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirInterval Number of seconds Background Block Error BBERThresh1Exceed Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTabl N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the last month (in resolution of days). winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayEntr N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx } winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMin Current Min Received Level Reference per Day. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMa Current Max Received Level Reference per Day. xRSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSL Number of seconds Receive Signal Level Thresh1Exceed exceeded the RSL1 threshold per Day. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐21...
Page 441 Current RX Mega Bytes per interval. lRxMBytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval. lTxMBytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva The number of times throughput was below lEthCapacityThreshUnder threshold in the each interval. Relevant for point to point systems. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva The number of times actual traffic was above lHighTrafficThreshExceed threshold in the each interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet lActiveSeconds service was not blocked in the each interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTab N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of the last month (in resolution of days). winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEnt N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx } winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx This table is indexed per Day number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayRx Current RX Mega Bytes per day. MBytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTx Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day. MBytes RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐22...
Page 442 RW When the Transmit power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring TSL1 counter is incremented. winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh1 RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL1 counter is incremented. winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh2 RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL2 counter is incremented. winlink1000OduPerfMonBBERThres RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring BBER counter is incremented. The units are 1/10 of a percent. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCapacit RW When the current throughput is below this yThreshKbps threshold the corresponding counter is incremented winlink1000OduPerfMonHighTraffic RW When the current traffic is above this threshold ThreshKbps then corresponding counter is incremented. winlink1000OduAgnGenAddTrapExt RW If 'yes' is chosen the ifIndex Unit Severity Time_T and Alarm Id from the winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable will be bind to the end of each private trap. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐23...
Page 443 N/A Entry containing the details of a currently RAISED trap. INDEX { winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCounter } winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCoun A running counter of active alarms. The counter is incremented for every new RAISED trap. It is cleared after a device reset. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmSeve Current Alarm severity. rity winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmId Unique Alarm Identifier (combines alarm type and interface). The same AlarmId is used for RAISED and CLEARED alarms. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmIfInd Interface Index where the alarm occurred. Alarms that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value: 65535. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmUnit Unit associated with the alarm. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTrapI ID of the raised trap that was sent when this alarm was raised. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTime Timestamp of this alarm. This number is in seconds from Midnight January 1st 1970. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmText Alarm display text (same as the text in the sent trap). winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsNum This counter indicates the size of the winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTable winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTable N/A This table includes the last events. When a trap is sent an event entry is added to the table. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐24...
Page 444 External Alarm Input. INDEX { winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex} winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn This value indicates the index of the External Index Alarm Input entry. winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn RW This field describes the External Alarm Input. It Text is an optional string of no more than 64 characters which will be used in the event being sent as a result of a change in the status of the External Alarm Input. DEFVAL {Alarm Description} winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input AdminState is enabled or disabled. winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn This value indicates the current status of the Status External Alarm Input. winlink1000IduAdmSN IDU Serial Number winlink1000IduAdmIduDetectionM RW The parameter defines whether to send Ethernet frames to detect an IDU. The valid writable values are: userDisabled (3) userEnabled (4). A change requires a reset and is effective after reset. winlink1000IduAdmMountedTrunks Number of mounted trunks in the IDU winlink1000IduAdmLicensedTrunks Number of Licensed Trunks in the IDU RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐25...
Page 445 1 ‐ LAN2 bit 2 ‐ SFP bit value 0 ‐ not member of appropriate VID bit value 1 ‐ member of appropriate VID winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembersh RW VLAN Membership Untagged frames handling. ipUntaggedHandle The 3 values representing LAN1 LAN2 and SFP accordingly. For each port the optional values are: 1 ‐ Discard 2 ‐ Tag 3 ‐ Leave Unmodified winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembersh RW VLAN Membership Untagged frames tagging. ipTagUntagged The 3 values representing LAN1 LAN2 and SFP accordingly. The value on each port entry represent the tagging value which is built of: VLAN ID & VLAN Priority. winlink1000IduSrvDesiredTrunks RW Required trunks bitmap. Note that the number of possible trunks that can be configured may vary based on the IDU hardware configuration the selected air interface rate and the range of the installation. The provided Manager application enables the user to select only available configurations. A change is effective immediately if applied to a master unit and the link is in service mode. winlink1000IduSrvServices This parameter is reserved to the Manager application provided with the product. winlink1000IduSrvActiveTrunks A bitmap describing the currently open TDM trunks. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐26...
Page 446 Maximum rate index of the air interface which RateIdx make the service possible. winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesRea Information about the TDM Service availability. ‐ Not Applicable if the service is available. The reasons for TDM Service unavailability: ‐ The available throughput isn't sufficient for Service demands; ‐ The IDU HW doesn't support the service; ‐ A Link Password mismatch was detected; ‐ The external pulse type detected is improper for TDM services; ‐ A Software versions mismatch was detected. ‐ A‐Symetric TDD Mode Is Obligated. winlink1000IduSrvEthActive Represents the Ethernet service activation state. winlink1000IduSrvEthAvailable Represents the Ethernet service availability state. winlink1000IduSrvEthThroughput Current available Ethernet service throughput in bps. winlink1000IduSrvEthMaxInfoRate RW Holds the maximum bandwidth (kbps) to be allocated for Ethernet service. Value of zero means that Ethernet service works as best effort. The maximum value is product specific. Refer to the user manual. winlink1000IduSrvAvailableTrunksT A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be opened under T1 configuration. The values take into account the IDU hardware configuration the air rate and the installation range. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐27...
Page 447 Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control. winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAva Available options of the TDM Master Clock ilOptions Control each input status is represented by a bit. When the option is available the bit value is 1. When the option is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available options are: bit 2 = Automatic bit 3 = Trunk #1 bit 4 = Trunk #2 bit 5 = Trunk #3 bit 6 = Trunk #4 When no options are available the returned value is: 1 winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockDes RW Required TDM Master Clock. A change is ired effective after re‐activation of the TDM service. winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAct Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock. winlink1000IduTdmConfigTable N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table. winlink1000IduTdmConfigEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table entry. INDEX { winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex } winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex Table index. winlink1000IduTdmIfIndex Link index in the interface table. winlink1000IduTdmLineCoding RW This parameter applies to T1 trunks only. The parameter controls the line coding. Setting the value to each of the indices applies to all. A change is effective after the next open of the TDM service. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐28...
Page 448 N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. INDEX { winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex } winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex Table index. winlink1000IduTdmBackupMode RW TDM backup mode: Enable or Disable where the main link is the air link or the external link. Changes will be effective immediatly. winlink1000IduTdmBackupCurrentA TDM backup current active link: N/A air link is ctiveLink active or external link is active. winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSize RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferDefa TDM Jitter Buffer Default Size. The units are 0.1 ultSize x millisecond. winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMinS TDM Jitter Buffer Minimum Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMax TDM Jitter Buffer Maximum Size. The units are Size 0.1 x millisecond. winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSizeE RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size for evaluation. The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐29...
Page 449 HSUs configuration table index. winlink1000HbsAirConfUpMir RW Uplink MIR towards specific HSU in units of kbps. winlink1000HbsAirConfDownMir RW Downlink MIR towards specific HSU in units of kbps. winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuName RW HSU name. winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuLocation RW HSU location. winlink1000HbsAirConfDualAntTxM RW Transmission type when using Dual Antenna on both link's sides. spatial Multiplexing Diversity (using a single spatial stream) and Auto Selection (OMS control). winlink1000HbsAirConfNumOfTs RW Number of time slot which are allocated to specific HSU. winlink1000HbsAirConfGeoLocatio RW Geographic device location in format: latitude longitude. winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuType RW HSU type (1 = Fixed 2 = Stationary 3 = Mobile 4 = Transport) winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuLevel RW HSU level (1 .. 4) RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐30...
Page 450 Holds the RSS of specific link (HBS side). winlink1000HbsAirLinkHbsRssBal Holds the RSS Balance of specific link (HBS side). ‐2 : Radio 2 RSS is much stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐1 : Radio 2 RSS is stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐0 : Radio 2 RSS is equal to Radio 1 RSS. 1 : Radio 1 RSS is stronger than Radio 2 RSS. 2 : Radio 1 RSS is much stronger than Radio 2 RSS. winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuRss Holds the RSS of specific link (HSU side). winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuRssBal Holds the RSS Balance of specific link (HSU side). ‐2 : Radio 2 RSS is much stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐1 : Radio 2 RSS is stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐0 : Radio 2 RSS is equal to Radio 1 RSS. 1 : Radio 1 RSS is stronger than Radio 2 RSS. 2 : Radio 1 RSS is much stronger than Radio 2 RSS. winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuSerial Holds the serial number for specific HSU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkTxOperMode Holds the TX operation mode. winlink1000HbsAirHsuInBytes Number of frames received in the HSU Lan port. winlink1000HbsAirHsuOutBytes Number of frames transmitted from the HSU Lan port. winlink1000HbsAirHsuInFrames Number of bytes received in the HSU Lan port. winlink1000HbsAirHsuOutFrames Number of bytes transmitted from the HSU Lan port. winlink1000HbsAirHsuMacAddress HSU MAC Address. winlink1000HbsAirMaxTputDown Max Throughput Downlink. winlink1000HbsAirMaxTputUp Max Throughput Uplink. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐31...
Page 451 HSU Rx Rate in Kbps. winlink1000HbsAirHsuTxRateInKbp HSU Tx Rate in Kbps. winlink1000HbsAirHsuRxRateInFps HSU Tx Rate in Fps. winlink1000HbsAirHsuTxRateInFps HSU Tx Rate in Fps. winlink1000HbsAirLinkPeakTputDo Peak throughput in the DL direction (kbps). winlink1000HbsAirLinkPeakTputUp Peak throughput in the UL direction (kbps). winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilDownSec The average time percentage (in thousandths) RelMill out of the BTS DL capability that was used for transmitting data to the SU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilUpSecRel The average time percentage (in thousandths) Mill out of the BTS UL capability that was used for receiving data from the SU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilDownAll The time percentage (in thousandths) relative ocRelMill to the SU DL allocation that was used for transmitting data to the SU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilUpAllocR The time percentage (in thousandths) relative elMill to the SU UL allocation that was used for receiving data from the SU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilDownTra Average data throughput (Exported in Kbps) fficKbps transmitted in the DL towards the SU during the last second. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐32...
Page 452 RW Minimal contention slot length used for UCBP algorithm (in ms.) between 5‐20ms. winlink1000HbsAirUCBPSharingPer RW Sharing percentage used by UCBP algorithm (15‐ centage 75) winlink1000HbsBridgeAgingTime RW Timeout in seconds for aging. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanTable N/A Holds the bridge Vlan operations towards all the registered HSUs. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanEntry N/A HBS bridge Vlan table entry. INDEX { winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIndex } winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIndex HBS bridge Vlan table index. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIngress RW HBS bridge Vlan ingress. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanEgress RW HBS bridge Vlan egress. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanFilterIn RW HBS bridge Vlan filter in. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanFilterOut RW HBS bridge Vlan filter out. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanDoubleT RW HBS bridge Vlan double tag. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐33...
Page 453 RW The Vlan mode in the Egress direction ssMode winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblIngr RW The Vlan mode in the Ingress direction essMode winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter1 VID ssFilter1 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter2 VID ssFilter2 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter3 VID ssFilter3 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter4 VID ssFilter4 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblUnta RW Represents (in bitmap) if to Untag a frame after gFilteredBitmap it is filtered (Egress direction) [4 bits represent 4 filters]. winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblProv RW Holds the Provider TPID that is used in all iderTPID provider operations. winlink1000HbsServiceQoSMode RW Quality of Service mode. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐34...
Page 454 HSUs in the HBS. winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshTabl N/A Holds the performance monitor thresholds towards all the registered HSUs. winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshEntr N/A HBS performance monitor threshold table entry. INDEX { winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshIndex } winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshInde HBS performance monitor threshold table index. winlink1000HbsPerfMonTxThresh1 RW HBS performance monitor transmit power threshold. winlink1000HbsPerfMonRxThresh1 RW HBS performance monitor receive power threshold 1. winlink1000HbsPerfMonRxThresh2 RW HBS performance monitor receive power threshold 2. winlink1000HbsPerfMonBBERThres RW HBS performance monitor BBER threshold. winlink1000HbsPerfMonEstThroug RW HBS performance monitor estimated hputThreshKbps throughput Threshold. winlink1000HbsPerfMonHighTraffic RW HBS performance monitor high traffic threshold. ThreshKbps RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐35...
Page 455 N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters Table of the last month (in resolution of days). winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX Entry {ifIndex winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayIdx } winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay This table is indexed per Day number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay Current RX Mega Bytes per day. (Represents RxMBytes the LAN traffic RX direction toward the HSU) winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day. TxMBytes (Represents the LAN traffic TX direction from the HSU) winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay The number of times throughput was below EthCapacityThreshUnder threshold each day. Relevant for point to point systems. winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay The number of times actual traffic was above HighTrafficThreshExceed threshold each day. winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet ActiveSeconds service was not blocked each day. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐36...
Page 456 (Sync to HBS waiting for Evaluation command) 3 Bi‐directional link 4 Evaluate 2x2 5 Evaluate 3x3 6 Alignment Finished. winlink1000HsuAirAlignment3x3Ste Step number out of total steps in Throughput evaluation for 3x3 scenario. winlink1000HsuAirAlignment3x3Tot Total steps in Throughput evaluation for 3x3 alSteps scenario. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentEvalTo RW Evaluation timeout. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe The angle of the antenna. Used in the alignment portManualAngle process. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe Expected throughput for the whole sector in the portTputUpSector Uplink direction in this angle. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe Expected throughput for the whole sector in the portTputDownSector Downlink direction in this angle. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe RSS on chain 1. portRssChain1 winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe RSS on chain 2. portRssChain2 winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe RSS on chain 3. portRssChain3 winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe MCS index of the link in the uplink direction. portMcsIndexUp RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐37...
Page 457 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.1 DisplayString Trap's Description. Used for Trap parameters. winlink1000GeneralTrapSeverity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.2 Integer Trap's Severity. Used for Trap parameters. winlink1000GeneralCookie 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product used for saving user preferences affecting ODU operation. winlink1000GeneralEcChangesCoun 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.4 Integer This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremented upon each element constant write operation via SNMP or Telnet. winlink1000GeneralTelnetSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.5 Integer RW Enable/Disable Telnet protocol. winlink1000GeneralWISupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.6 Integer RW Enable/Disable Web Interface protocol. Mandatory Disabled ‐ No option to enable the feature. Mandatory Enabled ‐ No option to disable the feature. winlink1000GeneralSNMPSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.7 Integer RW Enable/Disable SNMP protocols RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐38...
Page 458 RW Security model used for this trap generation. Model 2.1.4 winlink1000OduAdmHostsUserNam 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RW User name used to generate the snmpv3 trap. 2.1.5 winlink1000OduAdmHostsPasswor 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RW Password used to generate the snmpv3 trap. 2.1.6 winlink1000OduAdmHostsIPv6 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RW Trap destination IPv6 address. A change is 2.1.7 effective immediately. winlink1000OduBuzzerAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 Integer RW This parameter controls the activation of the buzzer while the unit is in install mode. A change is effective immediately. The valid values are: disabled (0) enabledAuto (1) enabledConstantly(2) advancedAuto (3). winlink1000OduProductId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐39...
Page 459 <IP_Address>|<Subnet_Mask>|<Default_Gatew ay>| winlink1000OduAdmVlanID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 Integer RW VLAN ID. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. winlink1000OduAdmVlanPriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 Integer RW VLAN Priority. 0 is lowest priority 7 is highest priority. winlink1000OduAdmSN 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 DisplayString ODU Serial Number winlink1000OduAdmProductName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString This is the product name as it exists at EC winlink1000OduAdmActivationKey 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString RW Activates a general key. winlink1000OduAdmRmtPermitted 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString RW Mobile Application: permitted partner OduType. OduType winlink1000OduAdmCpuID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 Integer CPU ID RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐40...
Page 460 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.3 Integer Bridging Mode. Valid values are: disabled (0) enabled (1). winlink1000OduSrvRingLinkMode RW Mode of the link regarding ring topology. winlink1000OduSrvRingTopologySu Ring Topology options are: supported not pported supported winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdTable N/A Ring VLAN IDs table. winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdEntry N/A VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. INDEX { winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex } winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex Index of VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanId RW VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. winlink1000OduSrvRingEthStatus Represents the Ethernet service blocking state of a Rings link winlink1000OduSrvRingMaxAllowe RW Defines the minimal time (in ms) required for dTimeFromLastRpm determination of ring failure. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐41...
Page 461 RW Disable VLAN functionality. The following values can be set: 3 ‐ Disable ODU & IDU VLAN Configurations. winlink1000OduServiceVlanProvide Holds the possible Provider TPIDs. rListTPIDstr winlink1000OduEthernetRemaining 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.1 Integer Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps. Rate winlink1000OduEthernetIfTable N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table. winlink1000OduEthernetIfEntry N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex } winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. Integer ODU Ethernet Interface Index. winlink1000OduEthernetIfAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. DisplayString ODU MAC address. winlink1000OduEthernetIfAdminSt 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. Integer RW Required state of the interface. atus winlink1000OduEthernetIfOperStat 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2. Integer Current operational state of the interface. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐42...
Page 462 Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively. winlink1000OduAirSSID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. The Sector ID in Point‐To‐ Multi‐Point systems. winlink1000OduAirTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RW Required Transmit power in dBm . This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. The min and max values are product specific. A change is effective immediately. winlink1000OduAirSesState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Current Link State. The value is active (3) during normal operation. winlink1000OduAirMstrSlv 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer This parameter indicates if the device was automatically selected into the radio link master or slave. The value is undefined if there is no link. The value is relevant only for point to point systems. winlink1000OduAirResync 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.8 Integer RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to restart the synchronization process. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐43...
Page 463 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.1 Integer Number of channels that can be used. nels winlink1000OduAirChannelsTable N/A Table of channels used by automatic channels selection (ACS). winlink1000OduAirChannelsEntry N/A ACS channels table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex } winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex Channel Index. winlink1000OduAirChannelsFreque Channel frequency in MHz. winlink1000OduAirChannelsOperSt RW Channel state. Can be set by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. A change is effective after link re‐synchronization. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). Rewriteable only in Point‐To‐Point products. winlink1000OduAirChannelsAvail Channel state. Product specific and cannot be changed by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). winlink1000OduAirChannelsDefault Default channel's availability for all CBWs. The Freq valid values are: forbidden (0) available (1). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐44...
Page 464 Maximal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM RatioForSupporting and still enable proper operation of the aforementioned CBW. winlink1000OduAirRFD 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer Current radio frame duration in microseconds. winlink1000OduAirRatesTable N/A Air Rate indexes table for current channel bandwidth. winlink1000OduAirRatesEntry N/A Air Rate indexes table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex } winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex Air Rate index. winlink1000OduAirRatesAvail Air Rate availability depending on air interface conditions. winlink1000OduAirDesiredRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer RW Required Air Rate index. 0 reserved for Adaptive Rate. A change is effective immediately after Set operation to the master side while the link is up. winlink1000OduAirLinkDistance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer Link distance in meters. A value of ‐1 indicates an illegal value and is also used when a link is not established. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐45...
Page 465 Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service elBW10MHz 0.7.1.4 under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChan 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of TDM service nelBW10MHz 0.7.1.5 under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service elBW20MHz 0.7.1.6 under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChan 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of TDM service nelBW20MHz 0.7.1.7 under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service elBW40MHz 0.7.1.8 under Channel BW of 40MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐46...
Page 466 RW Desired Synchronization Protocols hronizationProtocol winlink1000OduAirHssDiscover RW Initiate Discovery process of ODUs on the network. winlink1000OduAirHssNumberOfDi Number OF Discovered ODUs in network. scoveredODUs winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverTabl N/A HSS Discover Table. winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverEntr N/A ODU Discover Table entry. INDEX { winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverIndex } winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverInde HSS Discover Table Index. winlink1000OduAirHssDiscoverODU Hold ODU HSS status in compress format: Description Domain IP HSS Role Hss support Enabled HSS protocol Sync Status Location IPv6. winlink1000OduAirHssMasterSlave EHSM version compatibility. Relevant to Compatibility Ethernet HSS Clients only. winlink1000OduAirHssNumberOfAs Number of associated Ethernet HSS Clients. sociatedCU Relevant to Ethernet HSS Masters only winlink1000OduAirHssAssociatedC N/A Associated Ethernet HSS Clients Table. Releant UTable for Ethernet HSS Masters only. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐47...
Page 467 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. winlink1000OduAirMaxEIRP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in 0.1 dBm resolution. winlink1000OduAirAntennaGainCo 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer Antenna Gain Configurability options are nfigSupport product specific: supported not supported. winlink1000OduAirAntennaType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RW External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar. winlink1000OduAirRssBalance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RSS balance. Relation between RSS in radio 1 and RSS in radio 2. ‐2 : Radio 2 RSS is much stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐1 : Radio 2 RSS is stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐0 : Radio 2 RSS is equal to Radio 1 RSS. 1 : Radio 1 RSS is stronger than Radio 2 RSS. 2 : Radio 1 RSS is much stronger than Radio 2 RSS. winlink1000OduAirTotalTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Total Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal value While the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐48...
Page 468 FrequencyResolution 3.1.1.17 winlink1000OduAirComboSubBand 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 DisplayString Reflects the default channel list vector. DefaultChannelList 3.1.1.18 winlink1000OduAirComboSubBand 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Reflects the sub‐band DFS state. DfsState 3.1.1.19 winlink1000OduAirComboNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Represents the number of Multi‐band sub OfSubBands bands. winlink1000OduAirComboSwitchSu 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 DisplayString RW Switch sub band operation with a given sub bBand band ID. The get operation retrieves the current sub band ID. winlink1000OduAirComboCurrentS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 DisplayString Current Sub Band description. ubBandDesc winlink1000OduAirInternalMaxRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Max Ethernet throughput of the site (in Kpbs). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐49...
Page 469 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 TimeTicks Last CAC performed timestamp in hundredths elLastCACTimestamp 6.5.1.12 of a second since device up time. If no CAC has performed on the channel the return value will be 0. winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Was Radar detected on the channel. elRadarDetected 6.5.1.13 winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 TimeTicks Last Radar Detection timestamp in hundredths elRadarDetectionTimestamp 6.5.1.14 of a second since device up time. If no Radar has detected on the channel the return value will be 0. winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer Is the channel available for use. elAvailable 6.5.1.15 winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer The max RSS value of a received beacon on the elMaxBeaconRss 6.5.1.16 specific channel in dBm. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐50...
Page 470 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 DisplayString A string representing the channels available. FreqStr Each character represents one frequency when '1' means its available and '0' means its not. winlink1000OduAirAntConnectionT 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer RW Antenna connection type (External(1) Integrated(2) Embedded_External(3) Embedded_Integrated(4) EmbeddedBSA(5)). winlink1000OduAirAllowableChann 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 DisplayString RW A string representing the allowable channels. elsStr Each character represents one channel when '1' means its available and '0' means its not. winlink1000OduAirDfsAlgorithmTyp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer RW Bitmap for state of Radar Algorithm Type. Filters eState by bit's position: 0 = Zero PW 1 = Fixed 2 = Variable 3 = Staggered 4 = Long. winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetected N/A Last detected radars table. winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetected N/A ODU Multi‐band Sub Bands Table entry. INDEX Entry { winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedIndex } RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐51...
Page 471 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1. Gauge Current number of Background Block Errors starting from the present 15 minutes period. winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrIntegri 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1. Integer Indicates the integrity of the entry. winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrComp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1. OctetString Holds a compressed string of all data per ressed interface. Compressed Air Interface Structure (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) MinRSL (1) MaxRSL (1) RSLThresh1Exceeded (4) RSLThresh2Exceeded (4) MinTSL (1) MaxTSL (1) TSLThresh1Exceed (4) BBERThresh1Exceed (4) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) Compressed Etherent ODU interface (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) ActiveSeconds (4) winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalTa N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the last day (in resolution of 15 min intervals). winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalEn N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX {ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx } winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐52...
Page 472 Current number of Background Block Errors per interval of 24 hours. winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIntegri Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24 hours. winlink1000OduPerfMonDayCompr Holds a compressed string of all data per essed interface. Compressed Air Interface Structure (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) MinRSL (1) MaxRSL (1) RSLThresh1Exceeded (4) RSLThresh2Exceeded (4) MinTSL (1) MaxTSL (1) TSLThresh1Exceed (4) BBERThresh1Exceed (4) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) Compressed Etherent ODU interface (size in brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1) RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4) EthCapacityThreshUnder (4) HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) ActiveSeconds (1) winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTab N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the current 15 min interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrEnt N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. INDEX {ifIndex } winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMi 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4. Integer Current Min Received Level Reference starting nRSL from the present 15 minutes period. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐53...
Page 473 Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval. MinTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirInterval Current Max Transmit Signal Level per interval. MaxTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirInterval Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level TSLThresh1Exceed exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirInterval Number of seconds Background Block Error BBERThresh1Exceed Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTabl N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the last month (in resolution of days). winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayEntr N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx } winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMin Current Min Received Level Reference per Day. winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMa Current Max Received Level Reference per Day. xRSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSL Number of seconds Receive Signal Level Thresh1Exceed exceeded the RSL1 threshold per Day. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐54...
Page 474 Current RX Mega Bytes per interval. lRxMBytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval. lTxMBytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva The number of times throughput was below lEthCapacityThreshUnder threshold in the each interval. Relevant for point to point systems. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva The number of times actual traffic was above lHighTrafficThreshExceed threshold in the each interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthInterva The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet lActiveSeconds service was not blocked in the each interval. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTab N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of the last month (in resolution of days). winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEnt N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx } winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx This table is indexed per Day number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayRx Current RX Mega Bytes per day. MBytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTx Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day. MBytes RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐55...
Page 475 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.2 Integer RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL2 counter is incremented. winlink1000OduPerfMonBBERThres 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.2 Integer RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring BBER counter is incremented. The units are 1/10 of a percent. winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCapacit 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.2 Integer RW When the current throughput is below this yThreshKbps threshold the corresponding counter is incremented winlink1000OduPerfMonHighTraffic 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.2 Integer RW When the current traffic is above this threshold ThreshKbps then corresponding counter is incremented. winlink1000OduAgnGenAddTrapExt 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.1. Integer RW If 'yes' is chosen the ifIndex Unit Severity Time_T and Alarm Id from the winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable will be bind to the end of each private trap. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐56...
Page 476 RAISED and CLEARED alarms. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmIfInd 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3. Integer Interface Index where the alarm occurred. 2.1.4 Alarms that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value: 65535. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmUnit 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3. Integer Unit associated with the alarm. 2.1.5 winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTrapI 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3. Integer ID of the raised trap that was sent when this 2.1.6 alarm was raised. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3. Integer Timestamp of this alarm. This number is in 2.1.7 seconds from Midnight January 1st 1970. winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmText 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3. DisplayString Alarm display text (same as the text in the sent 2.1.8 trap). winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsNum 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4. Integer This counter indicates the size of the winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTable RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐57...
Page 477 Indicates the number of currently available lAlarmIn External Alarm Inputs. winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn N/A This is the External Alarm Inputs table. Table winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn N/A Entry containing the elements of a single Entry External Alarm Input. INDEX { winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex} winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn This value indicates the index of the External Index Alarm Input entry. winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn RW This field describes the External Alarm Input. It Text is an optional string of no more than 64 characters which will be used in the event being sent as a result of a change in the status of the External Alarm Input. DEFVAL {Alarm Description} winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input AdminState is enabled or disabled. winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmIn This value indicates the current status of the Status External Alarm Input. winlink1000IduAdmSN IDU Serial Number RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐58...
Page 478 RW IDU ports connection bitmap. bit 0 ‐ LAN1‐ LAN2 bit 1 ‐ SFP‐LAN1 bit 2 ‐ SFP‐LAN2 bit values: 0 ‐ ports are disconnected. 1 ‐ ports are connected. winlink1000IduAdmVlanMode RW Local IDU Vlan Mode. winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembersh RW VLAN Membership VLAN IDs list. ipVIDs winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembersh RW VLAN Membership ports code. Each value ipPortsCode represent the relation (bitmap) Between the suitable VID to the IDU ports. bit 0 ‐ LAN1 bit 1 ‐ LAN2 bit 2 ‐ SFP bit value 0 ‐ not member of appropriate VID bit value 1 ‐ member of appropriate VID winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembersh RW VLAN Membership Untagged frames handling. ipUntaggedHandle The 3 values representing LAN1 LAN2 and SFP accordingly. For each port the optional values are: 1 ‐ Discard 2 ‐ Tag 3 ‐ Leave Unmodified winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembersh RW VLAN Membership Untagged frames tagging. ipTagUntagged The 3 values representing LAN1 LAN2 and SFP accordingly. The value on each port entry represent the tagging value which is built of: VLAN ID & VLAN Priority. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐59...
Page 479 Cost of the TDM Service in bps. winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesTabl N/A ODU Possible TDM Services table. winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesEntr N/A ODU TDM Services table entry. INDEX { winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesIndex } winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesInde Table index. The index is the bit mask of the TDM service. winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesStat Represents the TDM service availability. winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMin Minimum rate index of the air interface which RateIdx make the service possible. winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMax Maximum rate index of the air interface which RateIdx make the service possible. winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesRea Information about the TDM Service availability. ‐ Not Applicable if the service is available. The reasons for TDM Service unavailability: ‐ The available throughput isn't sufficient for Service demands; ‐ The IDU HW doesn't support the service; ‐ A Link Password mismatch was detected; ‐ The external pulse type detected is improper for TDM services; ‐ A Software versions mismatch was detected. ‐ A‐Symetric TDD Mode Is Obligated. winlink1000IduSrvEthActive Represents the Ethernet service activation state. winlink1000IduSrvEthAvailable Represents the Ethernet service availability state. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐60...
Page 480 Available states of the TDM Transmit Clock Control each input status is represented by a bit. When the state is available the bit value is 1. When the state is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available states are: bit 2 = Transparent bit 3 = Local Loop Timed bit 4 = Remote Loop Timed bit 5 = Local Internal bit 6 = Remote Internal winlink1000IduTdmTxClockDesiredS RW Required state of the TDM Transmit Clock tate Control. A change is effective after re‐activation of the TDM service. winlink1000IduTdmTxClockActualSt Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control. winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAva Available options of the TDM Master Clock ilOptions Control each input status is represented by a bit. When the option is available the bit value is 1. When the option is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available options are: bit 2 = Automatic bit 3 = Trunk #1 bit 4 = Trunk #2 bit 5 = Trunk #3 bit 6 = Trunk #4 When no options are available the returned value is: 1 winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockDes RW Required TDM Master Clock. A change is ired effective after re‐activation of the TDM service. winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAct Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock. winlink1000IduTdmConfigTable N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐61...
Page 481 RW Evaluated TDM service bit mask. Setting this parameter to value that is bigger than the activated TDM service bit mask will execute the evaluation process for 30 seconds. Setting this parameter to 0 will stop the evaluation process immediately. winlink1000IduTdmBackupAvailabl Number of TDM backup trunks. eLinks winlink1000IduTdmBackupTable N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table. winlink1000IduTdmBackupEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. INDEX { winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex } winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex Table index. winlink1000IduTdmBackupMode RW TDM backup mode: Enable or Disable where the main link is the air link or the external link. Changes will be effective immediatly. winlink1000IduTdmBackupCurrentA TDM backup current active link: N/A air link is ctiveLink active or external link is active. winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSize RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐62...
Page 482 Holds HBS monitor data in compressed format: HBS Traffic Monitor In Bytes(4) Out Bytes(4) In Frames(4) Out Frames(4) HBS State (1) HBS Freq (4) Number of Links (2) EC Change Counter (4) Current Ratio (2) Total Air Frames (4) HBS Rx Rate in Kbps (4) HBS Tx Rate in Kbps (4) HBS Rx Rate in Fps (4) HBS Tx Rate in Fps (4) HBS Set Mode (1). winlink1000HbsAirConfChanges 16 characters that represent 16 HSUs. Each time a configuration is been changed increment the relevant character. winlink1000HbsAirConfTable N/A Holds the table for all registered HSUs in the sector (16 entries). winlink1000HbsAirConfEntry N/A HSUs configuration table entry. INDEX { winlink1000HbsAirConfIndex } winlink1000HbsAirConfIndex HSUs configuration table index. winlink1000HbsAirConfUpMir RW Uplink MIR towards specific HSU in units of kbps. winlink1000HbsAirConfDownMir RW Downlink MIR towards specific HSU in units of kbps. winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuName RW HSU name. winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuLocation RW HSU location. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐63...
Page 483 Holds the Estimated throughput from the HSU to the HBS. winlink1000HbsAirLinkRange Holds the range of specific link. winlink1000HbsAirLinkHbsRss Holds the RSS of specific link (HBS side). winlink1000HbsAirLinkHbsRssBal Holds the RSS Balance of specific link (HBS side). ‐2 : Radio 2 RSS is much stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐1 : Radio 2 RSS is stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐0 : Radio 2 RSS is equal to Radio 1 RSS. 1 : Radio 1 RSS is stronger than Radio 2 RSS. 2 : Radio 1 RSS is much stronger than Radio 2 RSS. winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuRss Holds the RSS of specific link (HSU side). winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuRssBal Holds the RSS Balance of specific link (HSU side). ‐2 : Radio 2 RSS is much stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐1 : Radio 2 RSS is stronger than Radio 1 RSS. ‐0 : Radio 2 RSS is equal to Radio 1 RSS. 1 : Radio 1 RSS is stronger than Radio 2 RSS. 2 : Radio 1 RSS is much stronger than Radio 2 RSS. winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuSerial Holds the serial number for specific HSU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkTxOperMode Holds the TX operation mode. winlink1000HbsAirHsuInBytes Number of frames received in the HSU Lan port. winlink1000HbsAirHsuOutBytes Number of frames transmitted from the HSU Lan port. winlink1000HbsAirHsuInFrames Number of bytes received in the HSU Lan port. winlink1000HbsAirHsuOutFrames Number of bytes transmitted from the HSU Lan port. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐64...
Page 484 Capacity Limit in Kilo bit per second. winlink1000HbsAirLinkAntennaTyp HSU External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar. winlink1000HbsAirHsuRxRateInKbp HSU Rx Rate in Kbps. winlink1000HbsAirHsuTxRateInKbp HSU Tx Rate in Kbps. winlink1000HbsAirHsuRxRateInFps HSU Tx Rate in Fps. winlink1000HbsAirHsuTxRateInFps HSU Tx Rate in Fps. winlink1000HbsAirLinkPeakTputDo Peak throughput in the DL direction (kbps). winlink1000HbsAirLinkPeakTputUp Peak throughput in the UL direction (kbps). winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilDownSec The average time percentage (in thousandths) RelMill out of the BTS DL capability that was used for transmitting data to the SU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilUpSecRel The average time percentage (in thousandths) Mill out of the BTS UL capability that was used for receiving data from the SU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilDownAll The time percentage (in thousandths) relative ocRelMill to the SU DL allocation that was used for transmitting data to the SU. winlink1000HbsAirLinkUtilUpAllocR The time percentage (in thousandths) relative elMill to the SU UL allocation that was used for receiving data from the SU. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐65...
Page 485 DownTraffic (4 bytes) UpTraffic (4 bytes). winlink1000HbsAirDelayVsTputOpt RW Delay vs. Throughput optimization type: 1 = Delay sensitivity 2 = Throughput optimized winlink1000HbsAirUCBPMinCS RW Minimal contention slot length used for UCBP algorithm (in ms.) between 5‐20ms. winlink1000HbsAirUCBPSharingPer RW Sharing percentage used by UCBP algorithm (15‐ centage 75) winlink1000HbsBridgeAgingTime RW Timeout in seconds for aging. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanTable N/A Holds the bridge Vlan operations towards all the registered HSUs. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanEntry N/A HBS bridge Vlan table entry. INDEX { winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIndex } winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIndex HBS bridge Vlan table index. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIngress RW HBS bridge Vlan ingress. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanEgress RW HBS bridge Vlan egress. winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanFilterIn RW HBS bridge Vlan filter in. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐66...
Page 486 RW The Vlan priority 0‐7 to be used when adding TAG or adding Provider winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblMaj RW The Vlan major mode orMode winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW The Vlan mode in the Egress direction ssMode winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblIngr RW The Vlan mode in the Ingress direction essMode winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter1 VID ssFilter1 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter2 VID ssFilter2 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter3 VID ssFilter3 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgre RW VLAN Filter4 VID ssFilter4 winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblUnta RW Represents (in bitmap) if to Untag a frame after gFilteredBitmap it is filtered (Egress direction) [4 bits represent 4 filters]. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐67...
Page 487 RW Strict QOS Boolean indication for each QOS group of the Downlink direction (4 values separated by comma). winlink1000HbsServiceMobilitySup Mobility Support (1 = Not supported 2 = ported Supported 3 ‐ Transport supported) winlink1000HbsServiceMaxNumOf Holds the maximum number of registered HSUs HSUs in the HBS. winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshTabl N/A Holds the performance monitor thresholds towards all the registered HSUs. winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshEntr N/A HBS performance monitor threshold table entry. INDEX { winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshIndex } winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshInde HBS performance monitor threshold table index. winlink1000HbsPerfMonTxThresh1 RW HBS performance monitor transmit power threshold. winlink1000HbsPerfMonRxThresh1 RW HBS performance monitor receive power threshold 1. winlink1000HbsPerfMonRxThresh2 RW HBS performance monitor receive power threshold 2. winlink1000HbsPerfMonBBERThres RW HBS performance monitor BBER threshold. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐68...
Page 488 The number of times actual traffic was above rvalHighTrafficThreshExceed threshold in the each interval. winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenInte The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet rvalActiveSeconds service was not blocked in the each interval. winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters Table of the last month (in resolution of days). winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX Entry {ifIndex winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayIdx } winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay This table is indexed per Day number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay Current RX Mega Bytes per day. (Represents RxMBytes the LAN traffic RX direction toward the HSU) winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day. TxMBytes (Represents the LAN traffic TX direction from the HSU) winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDay The number of times throughput was below EthCapacityThreshUnder threshold each day. Relevant for point to point systems. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐69...
Page 489 RW 1 S tart A lignment p rocess a nd i nitialize t he G IRO 2 Evaluate current manual angle 3 Finish Alignment process 4 Abort Alignment process winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentStatus Antenna Alignment status: ‐1 N/A (for non BSA products) 1 ISS (scanning for HBS) 2 CSA (Sync to HBS waiting for Evaluation command) 3 Bi‐directional link 4 Evaluate 2x2 5 Evaluate 3x3 6 Alignment Finished. winlink1000HsuAirAlignment3x3Ste Step number out of total steps in Throughput evaluation for 3x3 scenario. winlink1000HsuAirAlignment3x3Tot Total steps in Throughput evaluation for 3x3 alSteps scenario. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentEvalTo RW Evaluation timeout. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe The angle of the antenna. Used in the alignment portManualAngle process. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe Expected throughput for the whole sector in the portTputUpSector Uplink direction in this angle. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe Expected throughput for the whole sector in the portTputDownSector Downlink direction in this angle. winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe RSS on chain 1. portRssChain1 winlink1000HsuAirAlignmentLastRe RSS on chain 2. portRssChain2 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐70...
Page 490 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.1 DisplayString Trap's Description. Used for Trap parameters. winlink1000GeneralTrapSeverity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.2 Integer Trap's Severity. Used for Trap parameters. winlink1000GeneralCookie 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product used for saving user preferences affecting ODU operation. winlink1000GeneralEcChangesCoun 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.4 Integer This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremented upon each element constant write operation via SNMP or Telnet. winlink1000GeneralTelnetSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.5 Integer RW Enable/Disable Telnet protocol. winlink1000GeneralWISupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.6 Integer RW Enable/Disable Web Interface protocol. Mandatory Disabled ‐ No option to enable the feature. Mandatory Enabled ‐ No option to disable the feature. winlink1000GeneralSNMPSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.7 Integer RW Enable/Disable SNMP protocols RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐71...
Page 491 Disconnected. mismatchIDU major Indicates a mismatch between the IDUs. Raised by the master only. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: IDUs Mismatch: One Side is %s and the Other is %s. %s Is the type of the IDU. openedServices normal Indicates that services were opened. Raised by the master only. Contains 3 parameters: 1 ‐ Description: %n2 out of %n1 Requested TDM Trunks have been Opened 2 ‐ %n1: Is the requested number of TDM truncks 3 ‐ %n2: Is the actual number of TDM trunks that were opened closedServices normal Indicates that services were closed. Raised by the master only. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: TDM Service has been closed. The reason is: %s. %s Is the reason. incompatibleODUs critical Indicates that the ODUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Incompatible ODUs. incompatibleIDUs major Indicates that the IDUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Incompatible IDUs. incompatibleOduIdu major Indicates that the ODU and IDU are incompatible. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: The IDU could not be loaded. The reason is: %s. %s Is the incompatibility type. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐72...
Page 492 Indicates to non‐VLAN PC that after 2 minutes the system will support only VLAN tag on management interface. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: VLAN Mode is active. Non‐ VLAN traffic will be blocked in 2 minutes. spectrumAnalysis normal Indicates that the ODU is in Spectrum Analysis mode. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Spectrum analysis in progress. hbsHsuDeregisteredOffline normal Indicates that a HSU was deregistered offline (out of link) hbsHsuDeregisteredSuccessfully normal Indicates that a HSU was deregistered successfully hbsHsuRegisteredSuccessfully normal Indicates that a HSU was registered successfully hbsHsuRegistrationFailed normal Indicates that registration has failed hbsHsuViolatedState normal Indicates (on the HBS side) that a HSU is is violated state hsuViolatedState normal Indicates (on the HSU side) that the HSU is is violated state hbsUnregisteredSynchronizedHsu normal Indicates an unregistered HSU has been synchronized. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐73...
Page 493 External Alarm 2 ‐ <User Text> ‐ Alarm. bitFailedAlarm major The trap is sent if there is no way to recover from the situation.Contains two parameters: 1 ‐ Description: ODU power up built in test failed. Error code is: %n 2 ‐ %n number wrongConfigurationLoadedAlarm major The trap is sent if there is a way to recover from the situation.Contains two parameters: 1 ‐ Description: Wrong configuration loaded. Error code is: %n 2 ‐ %n number lanPort1DisconnectedAlarm major Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected.Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected. lanPort2DisconnectedAlarm major Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected.Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected. mngPortDisconnectedAlarm major Indicates the management port status changed to disconnected.Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Management port status changed to disconnected. externalAlarmInPort3Alarm major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #3. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: External Alarm 3 ‐ <User Text> ‐ Alarm. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐74...
Page 494 Indicates that the ODU is unauthorized. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Unauthorized ODU connection rejected. hotStandbyAlarm major Indicates that the hot standby secondary link was activated. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Secondary Link Is Active. sfpInsertion normal Indicates that a device was inserted to SFP Port sfpPort1DisconnectedAlarm major Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected.Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected. ringRplStateActiveAlarm major RPL state changed to Active. desiredRatioCanNotBeAppliedAlarm normal Indicates Desired UL/DL RAtio Can Not Be Applied. cbwMismatch major Indicates that a Channel Bandwidth mismatch was detected.Contains two parameters: 1 ‐ Description: Channel Bandwidth Mismatch: one side is %n0 MHz and the other is %n1 MHz. %n0 is the local Channel Bandwidth value in MHz. %n1 is the remoet Channel Bandwidth value in MHz. gpsNotSynchronized major Indicates that the GPS is not synchronized with satellites. Pulses are self generated. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐75...
Page 495 Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: GPS Antenna current consumption above allowed maximum. GPS closed. gpsCommunicationFailiureAlarm major Indicates the GPS data isn't received. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: GPS Communication failiure. temperatureThresholdAlarm major Indicates the board temperature is above allowed maximum. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: GPS Antenna current consumption above allowed maximum. GPS closed. localRouterDiscoveryStatus major This Alarm will indicate that we have no connection with Track side router. 1 ‐ Description: MacLearningUpdate detected disconnection with Track side router %s %s ‐ Default gateway IP TrackRouterDiscoveryStatus major This Alarm will indicate that we have no connection with Track side router. 1 ‐ Description: MacLearningUpdate detected disconnection with Track side router %s %s ‐ Default gateway IP btsTargetUnreachable major This Alarm will indicate that we have no connection with Bts desired target. 1 ‐ Description: TNC detected disconnection with the BTS target %s %s ‐ Default gateway IP RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐76...
Page 496 3 ‐ <User Text> ‐ Alarm Cleared. externalAlarmInPort4Clear normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 4 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: External Alarm 4 ‐ <User Text> ‐ Alarm Cleared. swVersionsMatchFullCompatibilityClear normal The trap is sent if SW versions match. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Software Versions compatible swVersionsMatchRestrictedCompatibilityClear normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and link functionality is not restricted. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Software Versions compatible swVersionsMatchSoftwareUpgradeRequiredClear normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and SW upgrade is successful. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Software Versions compatible swVersionsCompatibleClear normal The trap is sent if SW versions compatible Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Software Versions compatible hssMultipleSourcesDisappearedClear normal Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources disappeared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: HSS multiple sync pulse sources disappeared. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐77...
Page 497 Indicates Ethernet service's state ‐ blocked \ unblocked. Contains a single parameter: 1 ‐ Description: Ethernet's state (blocked \ unblocked) ringFirstRpmReceived normal Ring application: in non‐RPL link indicates first from a specific RPL was received. Contains a single parameter: 1 ‐ Description: RPM's VLAN ID ringEthernetSrviceUnblockedTO normal Ring application: in non‐RPL link Ethernet service is unblocked due to RPM timeout. gpsSynchronized normal Indicates that the GPS is synchronized with satellites. hbsEncryptionClear normal Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its description including the HSU's name hbsEhServiceOpenedToHsu normal Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its description including the HSU's name hbsSynchronizedHsuAlarm normal Indicates a registered HSU is synchronized. hbsActiveHbs normal Indicates when HBS has been activated. switchCBW normal Switching Channel Bandwidth. changeRatio normal HBS Tx ratio has changed. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐78...
Page 498 Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Hot Backup %s unit activated. %s ‐ Primary Or Secondary Unit hobupStandbyState normal Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 ‐ Description: Hot Backup in Standby state: %s unit. %s ‐ Primary Or Secondary Unit gpsOverCurrentClear normal Indicates the GPS Antenna current consumption is valid. temperatureThresholdClear normal Indicates the board temperature is valid. localRouterDiscoverySucceed normal Indicated the we succeeded to discover train router in ip %s MAC address %s %s Train IP %s Train MAC Address TrackRouterDiscoverySucceed normal Indicated the we succeeded to discover track router in ip %s MAC address %s %s Train IP %s Train MAC Address btsTargetIsReachable normal Indicated the we succeeded to establish connection with the Bts desired target (%s) %s Target IP RADWIN Manager Traps The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events. These traps are shown in the RADWIN Managerr Events Log. A list of Trap Messages as displayed by the RADWIN Manager is shown in Table 12‐4. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 C‐79...
Page 499: Appendix D: Rf Exposure
Appendix D: RF Exposure The antennas used for the following transmitters must be installed so as to provide a minimum separation distance from bystanders as specified in the following tables: Table D‐1: Safety Distances for RADWIN 5000 HPMP FCC and IC Products Frequency Antenna gain Min. Safety Band FCC ID IC ID [dBi] Distance [cm] [GHz] Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD All sectors 5.3/5.4 Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD All gains Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD 32, 29 Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD 16, 15.5 Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD 14, 13 Q3KRW5XMOD 5100A‐RW5XMOD...
Page 500 RF Exposure Table D‐2: Safety Distances for RADWIN 5000 HPMP ETSI Products Min. Safety Frequency Band Antenna gain Distance [GHz] [dBi] [cm] 5.8/5.3/5.4/2.4 All gains RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 D‐2...
Page 501: Appendix E: Setting Antenna Parameters
Appendix E: Setting Antenna Parameters Antenna Issues The choice of Tx Power, antenna gain and cable loss (between the radio and the antenna) determines the EIRP and is affected by such considerations as radio limitations and regulatory restrictions. Before proceeding to antenna installation details, the following background information should be considered: About Single and Dual Antennas Each RADWIN 5000 HPMP ODU is made of two radio transceivers (radios). The radios make use of algorithms that utilize both Spatial Multiplexing and Diversity resulting in enhanced capacity, range and link availability. The number of antennas (i.e. radios) used is determined by user configuration and by automatic system decisions, explained below. Dual Antennas at the HBS and an HSU When using dual antennas at both sites (single bipolar antenna or two mo‐unipolar antennas) you can choose between Spatial Multiplexing Mode and Diversity Mode. Spatial Multiplexing Mode Under this mode, the system doubles the link capacity. At the same time, it keeps the same rate and modulation per radio as was used with single antenna, thus increasing capacity, range and availability. For example with a dual antenna RADWIN 5000 HPMP can transmit at modulation of 64QAM and FEC of 5/6 and get an air rate of 130 Mbps, compared to 65 Mbps with single antenna. To work in this mode, each antenna port must be connected to an antenna, the RSS level in both receivers should be balanced and a minimal separation between the antennas must be maintained. (For example, by using dual polarization antennas a cross polarization separation is attained). RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 E‐1...
Page 502 Single Antennas at Both Sites Upon selecting Antenna Type as Dual, RADWIN 5000 HPMP automatically selects this mode and doubles the air rates. RADWIN Manager indicates a case of unbalanced RSS between the two antennas in the HBS panels. Diversity Mode Diversity Mode uses two antennas to improve the quality and reliability of the link. Often, there is not a clear line‐of‐sight (LOS) between transmitter and receiver. Instead the signal is reflected along multiple paths before finally being received. Each such “bounce” can introduce phase shifts, time delays, attenuations, and even distortions that can destructively interfere with one another at the aperture of the receiving antenna. Antenna diversity is especially effective at mitigating these multi‐path situations. This is because multiple antennas afford a receiver several recordings of the same signal. Each antenna will be exposed to a different interference environment. Thus, if one antenna is undergoing a deep fade, it is likely that another has a sufficient signal. Collectively such a system can provide a robust link. Antenna diversity requires antenna separation which is possible by using a dual‐polarization antenna or by two spatially separated antennas. Use Diversity instead of Spatial Multiplexing in the following situations: • When the system cannot operate in Spatial Multiplexing Mode • When one of the receivers has high interference compared to the second receiver (i.e. the system is “unbalanced”) • When you achieve higher capacity in Diversity Mode than in Spatial Multiplexing Mode • When high robustness is of importance and the capacity of Diversity Mode is sufficient (up to 25 Mbps full duplex) Single Antennas at Both Sites By selecting a single antenna at the HBS and HSU, the ODUs operate with a single radio that is connected to the ANT 1 connector. The second radio is automatically shut down. Single at One Site, Dual Antennas at the Other In this mode one of the sites uses the ODU with a single antenna while the other site uses the ODU with a dual antenna. The advantages in this mode in comparison to using a single antenna in both sites are doubled total Tx Power and additional polarization and/or space diversity (depending on the polarization of installed antennas). The air rates used in this mode are same as when using single antennas in both sites. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70...
Page 503 Single at One Site, Dual Antennas at the Other Table E‐1 summarizes the situation: (SM =Spatial Multiplexing) Table E‐1: Spatial Multiplexing ‐ Diversity settings Number of Max Full Antennas Mode Duplex Capacity Site A Site B 50 Mbps Diversity 25 Mbps 25 Mbps 25 Mbps 25 Mbps Site A and B may be HBS or HSU. The rates used by RADWIN 5000 HPMP are shown in Table E‐2 below: Table E‐2: RADWIN 5000 HPMP Air rates Air‐Rate [Mbps] Antenna Modulation 20 MHz 40 MHz Single BPSK 13.5 Single QPSK Single QPSK 19.5 40.5 Single 16QAM Single 16QAM...
Page 504: Considerations For Changing Antenna Parameters
Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Table E‐2: RADWIN 5000 HPMP Air rates (Continued) Air‐Rate [Mbps] Antenna Modulation 20 MHz 40 MHz Dual 64QAM Dual 64QAM Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Let: max Available Tx Power denote the maximum Tx Power practically available from an ODU. (It appears as Tx Power per Radio.) maxRegEIRP denote the maximum EIRP available by regulation. It will be determined by three factors: • per band/regulation • per channel bandwidth • antenna gain maxRegTxPower denote the maximum regulatory Tx Power for the equipment, also having regard the above three points. Then, the following relationship must be satisfied:  maxAvailableTxPower min maxRegEIRP ... (*)  – AntennaGain CableLoss maxRegTxPower The Tx Power (per radio) indicates the power of each radio inside the ODU and is used for Link Budget Calculations. The Tx Power (System) shows the total transmission power of the ODU and is used to calculate the EIRP according to regulations.
Page 505 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters The inequality (*) above is always satisfied by the system in accordance with the relevant regulation. The precise relationship between the items in inequality (*) is as follows: • Required Tx Power (per radio) will be adjusted down to the lesser of the value entered and maxAvailableTxPower • Tx Power (system) is maxAvailableTxPower + 3 (for 2 radios) • Max EIRP is maxRegEIRP. • EIRP is maxAvailableTx Power + Antenna Gain ‐ Cable Loss RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 E‐5...
Page 506: Appendix F: Regional Notice: French Canadian
Appendix F: Regional Notice: French Canadian Procédures de sécurité Généralités Avant de manipuler du matériel connecté à des lignes électriques ou de télécommunications, il est conseillé de se défaire de bijoux ou de tout autre objet métallique qui pourrait entrer en contact avec les éléments sous tension. Mise à la terre Tous les produits RADWIN doivent être mis à la terre pendant l'usage courant. La mise à la terre est assurée en reliant la fiche d'alimentation à une prise de courant avec une protection de terre. En outre: • La cosse de masse sur l'IDU‐C doit être constamment connectée à la protection de terre, par un câble de diamètre de 18 AWG ou plus. Le matériel monté sur rack doit être installé seulement sur des racks ou armoires reliés à la terre • Une ODU doit mise à la terre par un câble de diamètre de 10 AWG ou plus • Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs sur la connection à la terre De plus: • Il faut toujours connecter la terre en premier et la déconnecter en dernier • Il ne faut jamais connecter les câbles de télécommunication à du matériel non à la terre • Il faut s'assurer que tous les autres câbles sont déconnectés avant de déconnecter la terre RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 F‐1...
Page 507 Protection contre la foudre Protection contre la foudre L'utilisation de dispositifs de protection contre la foudre dépend des exigences réglementaires et de l'utilisateur final. Toutes les unités extérieures RADWIN sont conçues avec des circuits de limitation de surtension afin de minimiser les risques de dommages dus à la foudre. RADWIN conseille l'utilisation d'un dispositif de parafoudre supplémentaire afin de protéger le matériel de coups de foudre proches. Matériel supplémentaire requis L'équipement requis pour l'installation du matériel est le suivant: • Pince à sertir RJ‐45 (si un câble pré‐assemblé ODU/IDU n'est pas utilisé) • Perceuse (pour le montage sur mur seulement) • Câbles de terre IDU et ODU • Clef 13 mm (½) • Câble ODU ‐ IDU si non commandé (type extérieur, CAT‐5e, 4 paires torsadées, 24 AWG) • Colliers de serrage • Ordinateur portable avec Windows 2000 ou Windows XP. Précautions de sécurité pendant le montage de ODU Avant de connecter un câble à l'ODU, la borne protectrice de masse (visse) de l'ODU doit être connectée à un conducteur externe protecteur ou à un pylône relié à la terre. Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs sur la connection à la terre. Seulement un personnel qualifié utilisant l'équipement de sécurité approprié doit pouvoir monter sur le pylône d'antenne. De même, l'installation ou le démontage de ODU ou de pylônes doit être effectuée seulement par des professionnels ayant suivi une formation.  Pour monter l'ODU: 1. Vérifier que les supports de fixation de l'ODU sont correctement mis à la terre. 2. Monter l'unité ODU sur le pylône ou sur le mur; se référer à la Installation sur pylône et mur au dessous. 3. Connecter la câble de terre au point de châssis sur l'ODU. 4. Relier le câble ODU‐IDU au connecteur ODU RJ‐45. 5. Visser les presses‐étoupe de câbles pour assurer le scellement hermétique des unités ODU. 6. Attacher le câble au pylône ou aux supports en utilisant des colliers classés UV.
Page 508: Installation Sur Pylône Et Mur
• Les appareils sont prévus pour être installés par un personnel de ser‐ vice. • Les appareils doivent être connectés à une prise de courant avec une protection de terre. • Le courant CC du IDU‐C doit être fourni par l'intermédiaire d'un dis‐ Prudence joncteur bipolaire et le diamètre du câble doit être de 14 mm avec un conduit de 16 mm. Installation sur pylône et mur L' ODU ou l'O‐PoE peuvent être montés sur un pylône ou un mur. Contenu du kit de montage ODU Le kit de montage ODU comprend les pièces suivantes: • une grande clame (voir Figure F‐1) • une petite clame (voir Figure F‐2) • un bras (voir Figure F‐3) • quatre visses hex tête M8x40 • deux visses hex tête M8x70 • quatre rondelles plates M8 • trois rondelles élastiques M8 • deux écrous M8. Figure F‐1: grande clame Figure F‐2: petite clame Figure F‐3: bras RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 F‐3...
Page 509 Montage sur un pylône Montage sur un pylône Figure F‐4: Montage sur un pylône RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 F‐4...
Page 510: Figure F-5 Montage Sur Un
Montage sur un mur Montage sur un mur Figure F‐5: Montage sur un mur RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 F‐5...
Page 511 Montage d'une antenne externe Montage d'une antenne externe L'antenne externe optionnelle peut être montée sur un pylône. Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe Le kit de montage d'une antenne externe comprend les pièces suivantes • Douze rondelles plates • Huit rondelles élastiques • Huit écrous hex • Quatre boulons • Un support en U • Un support à pivotement • Deux courroies de fixation en métal  Pour installer une antenne externe sur un pylône: 1. Attacher le support en U à l'arrière de l'antenne en utilisant quatre rondelles plates, quatre rondelles élastiques et quatre écrous hex. 2. Attacher le support à pivotement au support en U en utilisant huit rondelles plates, quatre rondelles élastiques, quatre écrous hex et quatre boulons. 3. Passer les deux courroies de fixation par les fentes verticales dans le support à pivotement. 4. Attacher l'antenne au pylône en utilisant les deux courroies de fixation . Ajuster l'inclinaison nécessaire en utilisant l'échelle angulaire et serrer tous les boulons et écrous à la position requise. RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 F‐6...
Page 512: Index
E‐4 False Radar Mitigation 19‐1 dual at the HBS and an HSU E‐1 registering the device 20‐1 issues E‐1 TDWR Table 20‐5 setting parameters E‐1 Diagnostic Aids, other 12‐18 single and dual E‐1 Display View Persistence 5‐20 single at both sites E‐2 single at one site, dual at the other E‐2 Tx and 8‐4 Ethernet, service configuration 8‐25 Assured throughput 1‐3, 6‐35 events 5‐41 availability recent 12‐8 Link Budget 23‐2 Web Interface 25‐14 External Antennas 4‐8 Base Station Panel 5‐25 Base Station Radios 4‐2 False Radar Mitigation 9‐7 Base Station, Installing 4‐15 configuring 19‐2 described 19‐1 DFS 19‐1 Cables and connectors 4‐13 facilities 19‐1 Capacity Upgrade 22‐1 FCC/IC Considerations 19‐3 Bulk (Sector) HSU 22‐4 Individual HSU 22‐3 Persistency 22‐4 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.5.70 Index 1...
Page 513 Suspending 8‐46 setting up for QoS 21‐2 updating services 8‐46, 11‐13 template, creating nomadic entries for a Hub Site Synchronization ‐ see HSS sector 6‐37 throughput mode 8‐3 IDU‐H battery mode 11‐12 A Base Station Alternative to PoE Devices updating services 11‐13 4‐25 IDU‐H aggregation unit 4‐6 and link configuration 15‐3 Incorrect IP Address 5‐11 and RFP 13‐4 Incorrect Password 5‐12 and sector configuration 14‐5 Installing cabling sequence 14‐4 Base Station 4‐15 connecting an HSS unit 14‐1 Subscriber Units 4‐26 described 13‐1, 14‐1, 15‐1 Tools and Materials 4‐12, 4‐33 error notification 14‐5 unpacking and checking 4‐2 hardware installation 13‐4, 14‐1 Internal ESD Protection circuits 4‐14 Radio Frame Pattern (RFP) with 13‐4 Invalid Read/Write Community String 5‐12 to ODU unit connection pinout 13‐4, 14‐ IPv6 configuring 8‐6 total cable length 14‐5 display mode 5‐40 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release3.5.70 Index 2...
Page 514 DC B‐4 Link Compatibility 12‐4 to ODU cable (HBS and HSU) B‐1 list view 5‐17 Power Over Ethernet Devices ‐ see PoE logging on pre‐configuration 11‐21 to the Web Interface 25‐7 confirming 11‐27 Logging on to a HSU 5‐35 starting 11‐20 Log‐on Errors and Cautions 5‐11 Preferences, setting 5‐39 Manager Traps 12‐16 map view 5‐15 Configurable Time‐to‐Live (TTL) 21‐4 using 5‐20 overview 21‐1 Maximum Information Rate (MIR) 6‐31, 8‐40 prerequisites 21‐1, 22‐1 setting up 21‐1 control method C‐2 setting up an HSU for 21‐3 Interface API C‐2 setting up the HBS for 21‐2 manager traps C‐79 Quality of Service, see QoS parameters C‐3 Reference C‐1, C‐1, C‐1, C‐72 structure, private C‐2, C‐6 radio parameters 11‐21 supported variables from RFC 1213 C‐4 terminology C‐1 Exposure D‐1 trap parameters C‐72 Planning 3‐4 traps C‐72 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release3.5.70 Index 3...
Page 515 Ethernet trap authentication in Events Preferences service 18‐7 5‐41 configuration using the Manager 18‐6 usr, password in log‐on 5‐8 functionality 18‐1 Software Upgrade 17‐1 management and service separation 18‐ available 12‐5 described 17‐1 port functionality 18‐3 recommended 12‐6 QinQ (Double Tagging) 18‐2 required 12‐6 requirements 18‐1 upgrading an installed sector 17‐2 tagging 18‐2 Spectrum View 24‐1 terminology 18‐1 described 24‐1 untagging 18‐3 display function buttons 24‐5 main window, HBS 24‐2 running from HBS 24‐6 running from HSU 24‐8 Web Interface two ways to run 24‐2 advanced configurations 25‐6 where data is stored 24‐2 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release3.5.70 Index 4...
Page 516 WiFi active icon 11‐7 Connectivity 11‐17 enable, disable 11‐10 RADWIN 5000 HPMP User Manual Release3.5.70 Index 5...
Page 518 Item Version Build Date 3.5.70 NMS 9.6.00.07 9585 03/12/2014 SWU ‐ Inventory 3.5.70.00 3570.00 30/11/2014 MIB 9.5.90.00 9561 11/08/2014 9390 11/02/2014 Release type 01/01/2015...

Radwin 5000 HPMP User Manual

Chapter 1: About this User Manual

Chapter 2: Introduction

Chapter 3: Site Survey

Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Chapter 6: Installing the Sector

Chapter 7: Operating under the FCC Unrestricted Contention Based Protocol

Chapter 8: Managing the Sector

Chapter 9: Direct HSU Configuration

Chapter 10: Smart Bandwidth Management

Chapter 11: Bringing up a Mobility Sector

Chapter 12: Monitoring and Diagnostics

Chapter 13: Hub Site Synchronization

Chapter 14: Serial Hub Site Synchronization

Chapter 15: Hub Site Synchronization over Ethernet

Chapter 16: Using the RADWIN GSU

Chapter 17: Software Backup and Upgrade

Chapter 18: VLAN Functionality with RADWIN 5000 HPMP

Chapter 19: False Radar Mitigation Facilities

Chapter 20: FCC/IC DFS Considerations

Chapter 21: Quality of Service

Chapter 22: Capacity Upgrade

Chapter 23: Link Budget Calculator

Chapter 24: Spectrum View

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Radwin 5000 HPMP

Summary of Contents for Radwin 5000 HPMP